JP7703836B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a play area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the play area based on a launch operation by the player. When a game ball launched from the game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the play area, the player is given a privilege, such as the payment of a predetermined number of game balls (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2002-78904 A

In the above-mentioned types of gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in their configuration in order to increase the attention paid to the game.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

The present invention relates to
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A game ball launching means capable of launching game balls into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a game ball enters a predetermined ball entry means provided in the game area;
a determining means for determining whether to transition a game state from a predetermined game state to a special game state that is advantageous to a player, based on the special information acquired by the special information acquiring means;
A means for controlling a predetermined notification means to perform a game operation based on the judgment by the judgment means, and to end the game operation as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
A means for transitioning to the special game state based on a result of the determination by the determination means;
A variable ball entry means that can be switched between a first state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the game area and a second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the game area than in the first state;
A means for executing switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable ball entry means when the special game state is entered;
A gaming machine comprising:
As game situations when the determination is made by the determination means in the predetermined game state, a first game situation, a second game situation which may be more advantageous to the player than the first game situation, and a third game situation which may be more advantageous to the player than the first game situation and may be more disadvantageous to the player than the second game situation can be configured;
A period from the establishment of a predetermined condition in the second gaming state to the change to another gaming state is configured to be shorter than a period from the establishment of a specific condition in the third gaming state to the change to another gaming state ,
A configuration in which the second gaming state can be changed to the third gaming state,
The present invention is characterized in that the configuration allows the third gaming status to change to the second gaming status .

The present invention can effectively increase attention to the game.

1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. 2A is a front view showing the configuration of the game board, and FIG. 2B is a front view of the main display unit. A front view of the variable winning unit. (a) A front oblique view of the first variable winning device, (b) a schematic diagram showing the passage structure related to the first variable winning device. A schematic diagram showing the flow path in a variable winning unit. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. 1 is a schematic diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used in lotteries, etc. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a hit/miss table for the first operating port. FIG. A schematic diagram showing a hit/miss table for the second operating port. 1A is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for a first operating port, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for a second operating port. A schematic diagram showing the relationship between hit types and various modes. 11 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between a high frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU of the main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the MPU of the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a game play control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a control process for a first operating port. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process for the first operating port. 13 is a flowchart showing a control process for a second operating port. 13 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process for the second operating port. 13 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. A flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the large prize opening. 11 is a flowchart showing a first opening and closing process. 13 is a flowchart showing a second opening and closing process. 13 is a flowchart showing a transition process when an opening/closing execution mode is ended. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for electric utility support. 13 is a schematic diagram comparing the variable display time and fixed display time for each support mode. 11 is a flowchart showing an electric utility switching process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display time setting process for an operating port. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the differences in variable display time and fixed display time for each game state. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the differences in variable display time and fixed display time for each game state. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the differences in variable display time and fixed display time for each game state. FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each game state. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram comparing each game state. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the change in balls held as the game progresses. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for operating ports in the second embodiment. FIG. A schematic diagram of the first variable winning device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each game state. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for operating ports in the third embodiment. A schematic diagram showing a variable display time table corresponding to a jackpot result. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the change in balls held as the game progresses. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for operating ports in the fourth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing a variable display time table for the third normal game state. A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the variable display time and the trigger for transition to a special game state. 13 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the setting process for the third normal gaming state. A block diagram showing the relationship between each game state in the fifth embodiment.

First Embodiment
A first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Figure 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10 seen from the front side, and Figures 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded form. Note that, for the sake of convenience, the components within the play area PE of the pachinko machine 10 are omitted in Figure 2.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a main machine part 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

The outer frame 11 is made of plate material connected on all four sides, forming a rectangular frame. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. Note that the outer frame 11 is not a required component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be attached to the island equipment of the game hall.

The gaming machine main section 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 in a state in which it can be opened and closed. Specifically, an upper support bracket 17 is fixed to the connection between the upper frame section and the left frame section of the outer frame 11, and a lower support bracket 18 is provided at the connection between the lower frame section and the left frame section of the outer frame 11. The upper support bracket 17 and the lower support bracket 18 form a support mechanism, which allows the gaming machine main section 12 to rotate forward of the pachinko machine 10 with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 (see Figures 2 and 3).

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main part 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main part 12 is supported rotatably relative to the outer frame 11. In detail, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front. The back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated backward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front (see Figure 3).

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in Fig. 2, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 having an outer shape substantially identical to that of the outer frame 11, and covers substantially the entire front area of the inner frame 13. A substantially elliptical window section 21 is formed in the center of the frame body 20 so that substantially the entire area of the play area PE described below can be viewed from the front, and the window section 21 is blocked from the rear side of the front door frame 14 by a glass unit 22.

The glass unit 22 comprises a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition that separates the holding area of the glass panels 23 into front and rear, and both glass panels 23 face each other from the front and rear with the partition in between. In other words, by ensuring a predetermined gap between both glass panels 23, interference between the glass panels 23 is avoided, and the playing area PE is doubly covered by the glass panels 23 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

It is not necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be attached individually to the frame body 20. Furthermore, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one, or three or more. However, from the viewpoint of improving safety and crime prevention, it is preferable to employ multiple glass panels and have each glass panel face each other at a specified gap from the front to the back. Incidentally, it is also possible to employ a panel member made of a transparent synthetic resin instead of the glass panels.

As shown in FIG. 1, various light emitting means such as lamps are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window section 21). For example, a circular illumination section 26 incorporating a light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the periphery of the window section 21. The circular illumination section 26 lights up or blinks in response to changes in the game state, such as when a jackpot is hit or a predetermined reach is reached. In addition, an error display lamp section 27 that lights up in the event of a predetermined error is provided at the center of the circular illumination section 26 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10, and prize ball lamp sections 28 that light up while prize balls are being paid out are provided on the left and right sides of the error display lamp section 27. In addition, speaker sections 29 that output sound effects according to the game state are provided close to the left and right prize ball lamp sections 28.

Below the window 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulge 31 and a lower bulge 32 that bulge toward the front are arranged side by side. An upper tray 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge 31, and a lower tray 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge 32. The upper tray 33 has the function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from the payout device described below, and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism described below while aligning them in a row. The lower tray 34 also has the function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 33.

A game ball launching handle 41 is provided to the right of the lower bulge 32 so as to protrude forward. When the game ball launching handle 41 is operated, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism described below.

As shown in FIG. 2, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is molded from synthetic resin and has a front door side upper tray passage that leads to the upper tray 33 and a front door side lower tray passage that leads to the lower tray 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving portion that protrudes rearward and opens upward is formed at the upper corner, and the receiving portion is divided into left and right by a partition wall to define an entrance portion of the front door side upper tray passage and an entrance portion of the front door side lower tray passage. Game balls that enter the front door side upper tray passage are guided to the upper tray 33, and game balls that enter the front door side lower tray passage are guided to the lower tray 34.

The front door frame 14 has protruding shafts at its upper and lower ends on the rear side of the pivot base end. These protruding shafts form an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13. In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, a plurality of hooks 49 extending rearward are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction on the rear side of the front door frame 14 on the pivot tip end side. These hooks 49 form a locking mechanism for the inner frame 13.

(Inner frame 13)
Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 2 and Fig. 3. The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 50 having an outer shape of a substantially rectangular shape similar to that of the outer frame 11. The height dimension of the resin base 50 is set to be slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. The resin base 50 is disposed close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the resin base 50. A fascia is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close this gap. The fascia is disposed below the resin base 50 (specifically, its lower end portion), and when the inner frame 13 is closed to the outer frame 11, the resin base 50 is placed on the fascia.

Support brackets 51, 52 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the front of the resin base 50 on the rotation base side. Axle holes are formed in the support brackets 51, 52, and the protruding shafts of the front door frame 14 are inserted into these axle holes, so that the front door frame 14 is supported rotatably relative to the inner frame 13.

The front of the resin base 50 has an insertion hole at the tip of the rotation for inserting the hook fittings 49 provided on the back of the front door frame 14. In this pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 3, the locking device 55 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is hidden and arranged on the back side of the inner frame 13. Therefore, the hook fittings 49 are engaged with the locking device 55 (more specifically, the front door hook receiving member) through the insertion hole, so that the front door frame 14 is locked so that it cannot be opened relative to the inner frame 13. The locking device 55 also has an inner frame hook member 57 that extends rearward from the inner frame 13. These inner frame hook members 57 are hooked on the hook receiving member 19 (see FIG. 2) of the outer frame 11, so that the main part 12 of the gaming machine is locked in a closed state relative to the outer frame 11.

A cylinder lock 58 for unlocking the locking device 55 is installed in the lower right corner of the resin base 50. The cylinder lock 58 is integrated with the locking device 55, and the locking device 55 is configured so that when a key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 58 is turned to the right, the front door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 13, and when the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 58 is turned to the left, the inner frame 13 is unlocked from the outer frame 11.

A roughly elliptical window hole 54 is formed in the center of the resin base 50, and the window hole 54 is blocked from the rear by the game board 60 attached to the resin base 50. The game board 60 is made of wooden plywood and a sheet material that covers the front surface of the plywood, and its front surface is exposed to the front side of the resin base 50 through the window hole 54. A game area PE where game balls flow down is formed in this exposed area, i.e., the front surface of the game board 60. The game board 60 is not limited to being made of wood, and can also be made of synthetic resin.

The game board 60 (particularly the various components arranged in the game area PE) will be described below with reference to Figure 4. Figure 4 is a front view of the game board 60.

(Game Board 60)
A plurality of openings of various sizes are formed in the game board 60, penetrating in the thickness direction (front-rear direction) of the game board. A general winning opening 61, operational winning sections 62, 63, variable winning devices 64, 65, a through gate 66, a variable display unit 67, etc. are disposed in each opening. When a ball enters an entry section such as the general winning opening 61, the operational winning sections 62, 63, or the variable winning devices 64, 65, it is detected by a detection sensor, and a privilege such as the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is given to the player based on the detection result.

Specifically, if a ball enters the general winning port 61, 10 game balls are paid out, if a ball enters the operational winning section 62, 2 game balls are paid out, if a ball enters the operational winning section 63, 1 game ball is paid out, if a ball enters the first variable winning device 64, 12 game balls are paid out, and if a ball enters the second variable winning device 65, 6 game balls are paid out.

At the bottom of the game board 60, an outlet 68 is provided, and game balls that do not enter the various entry sections are discharged from the game area PE through the outlet 68. Here, "entering" means that the game ball passes through a specified opening position, and includes not only the situation in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening position, but also the situation in which the game ball is not discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening position. In the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish from game balls entering the outlet 68, balls entering the general winning port 61, the operating winning sections 62, 63, the variable winning devices 64, 65, and the through gate 66 are also referred to as "winning".

The game board 60 is also provided with numerous nails 69 to appropriately distribute and adjust the flow path of the game balls, and various components (apparatus) such as windmills are also arranged. These nails 69, windmills, and other components differentiate the flow path of the game balls, and are adjusted so that winning the general winning opening 61 and the like occurs with a reasonable probability. The general winning opening 61 is only arranged on the left route, which will be described later, and game balls shot to the left route can win the general winning opening 61, while game balls shot to the right route, which will be described later, cannot win the general winning opening 61.

The variable display unit 67 is disposed in the center of the game board 60, and the above-mentioned operating ball entry sections 62, 63, etc. are disposed around the variable display unit 67. In the following explanation, the operating ball entry section 62 will be appropriately distinguished as the "first operating ball entry section 62", the operating ball entry section 63 as the "second operating ball entry section 63", the operating port of the first operating ball entry section 62 as the "first operating port 62a", and the operating port of the second operating ball entry section 63 as the "second operating port 63a".

The first actuating ball entry section 62 is broadly divided into a lower actuating ball entry section 62L arranged below the variable display unit 67 and a right actuating ball entry section 62R arranged to the right of the variable display unit 67. Of these lower actuating ball entry section 62L and right actuating ball entry section 62R, the right actuating ball entry section 62R is equipped with an electric device 71 as an opening/closing type ball entry assistance device (ball entry assistance means) or opening/closing member (opening/closing means).

The electric device 71 has a shutter and a solenoid-type drive unit that drives the shutter, and the position of the shutter can be changed by the drive unit to switch between an open state (accepting state) in which the ball can be inserted into the right-side actuating ball entry section 62R (right actuating port 62aR constituting the first actuating port 62a) and a closed state (non-accepting state) in which the ball cannot be inserted. The electric device 71 attached to the right-side actuating ball entry section 62R may be switchable between a state in which it is easy to insert the ball into the right actuating port 62aR and a state in which it is more difficult to insert the ball.

The through gate 66 is disposed in the play area PE (the right route described later in detail) upstream of the right-side actuated ball entry section 62R, more specifically, to the side (right) of the variable display unit 67. The through gate 66 allows game balls to pass in the vertical direction, and game balls that enter the through gate 66 flow downstream in the play area PE without being ejected from the play area PE. If a game ball passes through the through gate 66 and a lottery (support lottery) is won (support win), the electric device 71 is switched from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time.

The first variable winning device 64 is disposed at a position downstream of the right-side active ball entry section 62R on the right route. The first variable winning device 64 is formed with a first large winning opening into which multiple game balls can enter at the same time, and is provided with an opening/closing mechanism as an opening/closing means for opening and closing the first large winning opening. The opening/closing mechanism has a shutter as an opening/closing member for the first large winning opening. The shutter can be switched between an open state (assistance state or acceptance state) in which game balls can or can not enter, and a closed state (non-assistance state or non-acceptance state) in which game balls can or can not enter. The shutter is also connected to a variable winning drive section (more specifically, a solenoid), and is normally maintained in a closed state, and is switched to an open state when the internal lottery results in a transition to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode).

The second variable winning device 65 is disposed downstream of the first variable winning device 64 on the right route. The second variable winning device 65 is formed with a lower large winning opening into which multiple game balls can enter at the same time, and is provided with an opening/closing mechanism as an opening/closing means for opening and closing the lower large winning opening. The opening/closing mechanism has a shutter as an opening/closing member for the large winning opening. The shutter can be switched between an open state (accepting state) in which game balls can enter and a closed state (non-accepting state) in which game balls cannot enter. The shutter is also connected to a variable winning drive unit (more specifically, a solenoid), and is normally maintained in a closed state, and is switched to an open state when the internal lottery results in a transition to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode).

The special game state is a game state to which the player enters when a big win or special win occurs. The opening manner of the variable winning devices 64, 65 in the special game state is set so that the shutter opens up to a predetermined number of rounds (1, 2, or 10 rounds in this embodiment), with one round being defined as a predetermined period of time (8 sec or 0.8 sec in this embodiment) or a predetermined number of winnings (10 or 6 in this embodiment).

Details will be given later, but the special game state (opening/closing execution mode) shown in this embodiment can be broadly divided into a first winning mode and a second winning mode, which differ in the variable winning device to be opened and the opening/closing pattern.

In the event of a jackpot result, the game transitions to a special game state corresponding to the first winning mode. In the special game state corresponding to the first winning mode (first special game state), the first variable winning device 64 or the second variable winning device 65 is set as the target to be opened, and the opening is repeated up to a maximum of multiple rounds, with the passage of a predetermined opening time (specifically 30 sec) or the occurrence of a predetermined number of balls (specifically 10 balls) being one round. In contrast, in the event of a special winning result, the game transitions to a special game state corresponding to the second winning mode. In the special game state corresponding to the second winning mode (second special game state), the second variable winning device 65 is set as the target to be opened, and the second special game state ends when either the passage of a predetermined opening time (specifically 0.8 sec) or the occurrence of a predetermined number of balls (specifically 6 balls) is established. In this way, the first special game state is set so that the winning frequency is relatively high, and the second special game state is set so that the winning frequency is relatively low, creating a difference in the number of winning balls that can be won.

Next, the variable display unit 67 will be described. The variable display unit 67 has a pattern display device 75 that variably displays (changes in) patterns when a winning ball enters the working ball entry sections 62, 63 as a trigger.

The pattern display device 75 is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display, and the display contents on the display screen 75a are controlled by a display control device described later. In the central part of the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75, patterns are displayed, for example, lined up on the left, center, and right, and these patterns are displayed in a variable manner by scrolling vertically. When a jackpot or special win occurs, a predetermined combination of patterns is displayed stationary on a preset pay line, and the game transitions to the opening and closing execution mode. Note that the pattern display device 75 does not necessarily have to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be a dot matrix or 7-segment type display device.

In addition, a center frame 76 is disposed in the variable display unit 67 so as to surround the symbol display device 75. The center frame 76 is fixed to the front side of the game board 60, and in this fixed state, it stands up from the front of the game board 60, so that the gap dimension between the center frame 76 and the glass unit 22 is configured to be smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball. This prevents the game ball flowing down the game area PE from colliding with the symbol display device 75, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is roughly divided into the right route that bypasses the variable display unit 67 (more specifically, the center frame 76) from the right side, and the left route that bypasses it from the left side.

The above-mentioned right-side actuated ball entry section 62R, second actuated ball entry section 63, variable winning devices 64, 65, and through gate 66 are arranged on the right route, and game balls flowing down the left route are prevented from winning in the right-side actuated ball entry section 62R, second actuated ball entry section 63, variable winning devices 64, 65, and through gate 66. On the other hand, the first actuated ball entry section 62 is arranged on the left route, and game balls flowing down the right route are prevented from winning in the first actuated ball entry section 62 (the lower actuated port 62aL that constitutes the first actuated port 62a). By selecting the right route or the left route as the launch destination of the game ball (the flow path of the game ball) depending on the game situation, the player can play the game to his or her advantage. Details will be described later, but in the gaming machine shown in this embodiment, the speaker unit 29 and the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 suggest to the player the route along which the gaming ball should be shot depending on the game status, and if the gaming ball is shot along a route different from the suggestion, a warning is given to stop the shot.

A main display unit 81 is disposed on the protective member for the guide rail 100 disposed outside the play area PE. The front surface of the main display unit 81 faces the glass unit 22 (more specifically, the rear glass panel 23) that allows the play area PE to be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the facing portion is provided with a main display section D on which a predetermined image or the like is displayed. The main display unit 81 is electrically connected to a main control device, which will be described later, and the display content of the main display section D is configured to be controlled by the main control device.

The main display unit D has a first actuation port display unit D1 that displays the lottery results based on winning at the first actuation port 62 (first actuation port 62a), and a second actuation port display unit D2 that displays the lottery results based on winning at the second actuation port 63 (second actuation port 63a).

In the first actuation port display unit D1, a winning entry into the first actuation ball entry unit 62 (first actuation port 62a) triggers a changing display of a pattern, and as a result of stopping the changing display, the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning entry into the first actuation ball entry unit 62 is clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning entry into the first actuation ball entry unit 62 is a winning result corresponding to a transition to the special game state, the changing display in the first actuation port display unit D1 is stopped, a specified pattern is displayed as a stopping result, and then a transition to the special game state is made.

In the second actuation port display section D2, a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 is used as a trigger to display a varying pattern, and the result of the varying display stopping is the clear display of the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning entry into the second actuation port 63 (second actuation port 63a). If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning entry into the second actuation port 63 is a winning result corresponding to a jackpot or special win, the varying display in the second actuation port display section D2 stops, a specified pattern is displayed as the stopping result, and then a transition to the special game state is made according to the result.

Here, one game round corresponds to the period from when the variable display starts on the corresponding operating port display section D1, D2 based on a winning entry into any of the operating entry sections 62, 63, until the variable display stops to display a predetermined stop result, and until the preset fixed display time has elapsed while maintaining the stopped state. However, one game round is not limited to the above content, and for example, in a configuration in which a single display area is provided and the variable display is performed in that single display area regardless of the occurrence of a winning entry into any of the operating entry sections 62, 63, one game round may correspond to the period from when the variable display starts in that single display area, until the variable display stops to display a predetermined stop result, and until the preset fixed display time has elapsed while maintaining the stopped state.

The main display section D of the main display unit 81 is provided with a reserved number display section S1 for the first actuation port. The reserved number display section S1 for the first actuation port corresponds to the first actuation port 62a, and the number of times that game balls have entered the first actuation port 62a can be reserved up to four times, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting up the reserved number display section S1 for the first actuation port. Note that the second actuation port 63a shown in this embodiment does not have the reserved function that is provided to the first actuation port 62a, and therefore differs from the first actuation port 62a in terms of the ball entry configuration.

In addition to the various display sections described above, the main display section D of the main display unit 81 is also provided with a through gate display section DS that displays the lottery results based on winning the through gate 66. The through gate display section DS displays the changing patterns triggered by winning the through gate 66, and as a result of the stopping of the changing display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on winning the through gate 66 is clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on winning the through gate 66 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric role opening state, the through gate display section DS displays a predetermined stopping result, the changing display is stopped, and then the electric role opening state is entered. In the electric role opening state, the electric role 71 attached to the right-side operating ball entry section 62R is opened in a predetermined manner.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the number of times that a game ball has passed through the through gate 66 is reserved up to four times, and the main display section D of the main display unit 81 is provided with a through gate reserved number display section SS that displays the number of reserved balls.

Referring again to FIG. 2, the configuration of the inner frame 13 is described. Below the mounting area of the game board 60 in the resin base 50, a game ball launching mechanism 110 is provided that launches game balls toward the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball launching handle 41. The game ball launching mechanism 110 mainly comprises a solenoid 111 that launches game balls placed at a predetermined launch waiting position, a launch rail 112 that determines the launch direction of the game balls launched by the solenoid 111, a ball delivery device 113 that supplies game balls to the launch waiting position, and a base plate 114 on which these various components 111 to 113 are mounted. The base plate 114 is fixed to the resin base 50, thereby integrating it with the resin base 50.

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an obliquely inclined state so that it slopes upward toward the game board 60. A ball stopper that stops the game balls supplied from the ball sending device 113 in the above-mentioned launch waiting position is disposed near the downstream end (i.e., the lower end) of the launch rail 112. The solenoid 111 is disposed further downstream than the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power supply and launch control device, which will be described later. Based on the output of an electrical signal from the power supply and launch control device, the output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the extension/contraction direction, causing the game ball placed in the launch standby position to be launched toward the game board 60, or more specifically, toward the guide rail 100 attached to the game board 60.

The guide rail 100 defines the play area PE so that the outer shape of the play area PE is approximately circular. The guide rail 100 is composed of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 that are arranged to face each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the play ball, and a guide passage 103 is defined by the two rails 101 and 102. The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion that opens at the tip side (diagonally downward) of the launch rail 112 and an exit portion located at the top of the play area PE. The game ball launched based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the play area PE by moving in the order of the launch rail 112 → guide rail 100 (entrance portion → exit portion). By adjusting the amount of operation of the game ball launch handle 41, it is possible to hit the game ball to the area to the left of the variable display unit 67 in the play area PE (left route) or the area to the right of the variable display unit 67 in the play area PE (right route).

In addition, a return prevention member 106 is attached to the front side of the exit portion of the game board 60, specifically near the tip of the inner rail 101, to prevent game balls that have reached the game area PE from returning back into the guide passage 103, thereby preventing game balls that have already reached the game area PE from interfering with the launch of subsequent game balls.

The guide rail 100 (see FIG. 4) and launch rail 112 are arranged so that the entrance of the guide rail 100 and the tip of the launch rail 112 face each other diagonally across the bottom edge of the game board 60. In other words, the rails 100, 112 are arranged so that the entrance of the guide rail 100 and the tip of the launch rail 112 are offset left and right near the bottom edge of the game board 60. This brings the rails 100, 112 closer to the bottom edge of the game board 60, while forming a predetermined gap between the entrance of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112.

A foul ball passage 46 is disposed below the gap thus formed. The foul ball passage 46 is integrally molded with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If a game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 110 does not reach the play area PE and returns as a foul ball through the guide passage 103, the foul ball will enter the foul ball passage 46 through the above-mentioned gap. The foul ball passage 46 is connected to the lower tray passage on the front door side, and game balls that enter the foul ball passage 46 are discharged to the lower tray 34 shown in Figure 1. This prevents interference between the foul ball and the next game ball to be launched.

A through hole is formed in the resin base 50 to the left of the launch rail 112 (more specifically, the side supporting the front door frame 14) that penetrates the resin base 50 in the front-rear direction, and a passage forming member 121 is disposed in this through hole. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the resin base 50, and has a main body side upper dish passage and a main body side lower dish passage. The upstream sides of the main body side upper dish passage and the main body side lower dish passage lead to the game ball distribution section described below. In addition, the receiving portion of the passage forming unit 45 attached to the front door frame 14 fits in below the passage forming member 121, and the front door side upper dish passage is disposed below the main body side upper dish passage, and the front door side upper dish passage is disposed below the main body side lower dish passage.

An opening/closing member 124 for opening and closing the upper plate passage on the main body side and the lower plate passage on the main body side is attached below the passage forming member 121 in the resin base 50. The opening/closing member 124 is supported by a support shaft provided at its lower end so as to be rotatable in the front-rear direction, and a biasing member is provided to bias the opening/closing member to a forward position where the upper plate passage on the main body side and the lower plate passage on the main body side are closed. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is opened relative to the inner frame 13, the opening/closing member 124 rises as shown in the figure, closing the upper plate passage on the main body side and the lower plate passage on the main body side. This prevents the stored balls from spilling out when the front door frame 14 is opened while game balls are stored in the upper plate passage on the main body side or the lower plate passage on the main body side. On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening/closing member 124 is pushed open against the biasing force by the receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the upper tray passage on the main body side is connected to the upper tray passage on the front door side, and the lower tray passage on the main body side is connected to the lower tray passage on the front door side.

Next, the rear structure of the inner frame 13 (resin base 50 and game board 60) will be described with reference to Figure 3.

Bearing fittings 132 are arranged side by side on the upper and lower sides of the rotation base end on the back surface of the resin base 50. The bearing fittings 132 are formed with bearing portions spaced apart from each other on the top and bottom, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions.

The back surface of the resin base 50 is provided with multiple locking fittings 135, and as described above, the game board 60 is attached to the resin base 50 by these locking fittings 135. Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board 60 will be explained.

A display control device is attached to the variable display unit 67, which is located in the center of the game board 60, so as to cover the variable display unit 67 from behind (not shown). A notification/performance control device unit 142 is mounted behind the display control device so as to overlap the display control device. The notification/performance control device unit 142 is configured to include a notification/performance control device 143 and a mounting base 144, and the notification/performance control device 143 is attached to the mounting base 144.

The notification/performance control device 143 is equipped with a notification/performance control board that controls the audio and lamp displays, as well as the display control device, in accordance with instructions from the main control device, which will be described later. The notification/performance control board is housed in a board box 145 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

As shown in FIG. 3, a collection plate 150 is provided on the back of the game board 60 below the variable display unit 67. The collection plate 150 is provided with a game ball recovery mechanism that recovers game balls that have entered the various winning holes, a detection mechanism that detects the entry of game balls into the various winning holes, etc.

Regarding the game ball recovery mechanism, the collecting board 150 is provided with recovery passages corresponding to the various ball entry sections such as the general winning opening 61. These recovery passages run down from the ball entry sections along the back of the game board 60, and define the path along which the game balls fall. The recovery passages join near the bottom end of the game board 60, and all game balls that pass through the ball entry sections such as the general winning opening 61 are collected at the bottom of the game board 60 via the recovery passages. The outlets of each recovery passage are open downward, and at the end of the outlets (more specifically, below the game board 60) there is a discharge passage, which will be described later. The game balls that have collected below the game board 60 through the recovery passages are led out to the discharge passage. The outlet 68 also leads to the discharge passage, and game balls that have not won any of the winning openings are also led out to the discharge passage via the outlet 68.

Explaining the detection mechanism, the collection board 150 is provided with detection sensors that correspond to each of the various ball entry sections, such as the general winning opening 61. These various detection sensors are arranged at intermediate positions in each recovery passage leading to the ball entry section, such as the general winning opening 61, and detect the passage of the game ball when the falling path of the game ball is specified in the recovery passage. More specifically, each detection sensor detects the entry of a ball into a ball entry port, such as the general winning opening 61, when the game ball passes through a detection area provided at an intermediate position in each recovery passage. Specifically, a magnetic sensor is used that detects the change in the magnetic field that occurs when the game ball passes through the detection area.

These various detection sensors are electrically connected to a main control device unit 160 (more specifically, the main control device) provided on the rear side of the game board 60, and detection signals from these detection sensors are output to the main control device. The main control device unit 160 and its associated configuration will be described below.

The main control device unit 160 is mounted on the game board 60 so as to cover the assembly board 150 from the rear, and is composed of a mounting base 161 made of synthetic resin and a main control device 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. The main control device 162 is equipped with a main control board that has the function of controlling the main game (main control circuit) and the function of monitoring the power supply (power failure monitoring circuit), and the main control board is housed in a board box 163 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

The substrate box 163 comprises a box base (front case body) of a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (rear case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are connected by a sealing part that serves as a sealing means so that they cannot be opened, thereby sealing the substrate box 163. A plurality of sealing parts are provided on the long sides of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the sealing part as long as it is configured to connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner, but the box base and the box cover are connected to each other in an unopenable manner by inserting a locking claw into the long hole that constitutes the sealing part. The sealing process using the sealing part prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and even if unauthorized opening occurs, it is possible to detect such a situation early and easily, and it is possible to perform the sealing process again even after it has been opened once. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one long hole of the multiple sealing parts. Then, when the board box 163 is opened, such as when a malfunction occurs in the stored main control board or when inspecting the main control board, the connection part between the sealing part into which the locking claw is inserted and the other sealing parts is cut. This separates the box base and the box cover of the board box 163, and the main control board inside can be removed. If the sealing process is to be performed again, a locking claw is inserted into the long hole of the other sealing part. If a record of the board box 163 being opened is left on the board box 163, unauthorized opening can be easily detected by looking at the board box 163.

One short side of the board box 163 has multiple connecting pieces that protrude out to the side. These connecting pieces correspond one-to-one to the multiple connectable pieces formed on the mounting base 161, and the connecting pieces and the connectable pieces seal between the board box 163 and the mounting base 161.

(Back pack unit 15)
Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 has a back pack 201, to which a dispensing mechanism 202, a discharge passage panel and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached.

The back pack 201 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. 3, has a base part 211 to which the payout mechanism part 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover part 212 that protrudes to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a generally rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover part 212 is closed on the left and right sides and the top, and only the bottom is open, and is large enough to surround at least the variable display unit 67.

The base portion 211 has an external terminal board 213 at its upper right. The external terminal board 213 has various output terminals, and various signals are output to the management control device on the gaming hall side through these output terminals. In addition, the base portion 211 has a pair of upper and lower hook pins at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the back pack unit 15 is supported rotatably relative to the inner frame 13 by inserting the hook pins into the bearing fittings 132 (more specifically, the bearing portion) provided on the inner frame 13. In addition, a fastener for fastening to a fastening hole provided on the inner frame 13 is provided at the rotating tip of the base portion 211, and the back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 by fitting the fastener into the fastening hole.

The payout mechanism 202 is disposed on the base 211 so as to bypass the protective cover 212. The payout mechanism 202 is provided with a tank 221 that is disposed on the top of the back pack 201 and opens upward, and game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 221. A tank rail that gently slopes toward the downstream side is connected to the bottom of the tank 221, and a case rail that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail. A payout device 222 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail. The game balls paid out from the payout device 222 are supplied to a game ball distribution section provided on the base 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage provided downstream of the payout device 222.

The game ball distribution section has the function of distributing game balls dispensed from the payout device 222 to either the upper tray 33, the lower tray 34, or the discharge passage described below, and is formed so that the inner opening leads to the upper tray 33 via the above-mentioned main body side upper tray passage and front door side upper tray passage, and the outer opening leads to the lower tray 34 via the main body side lower tray passage and front door side lower tray passage.

As shown in FIG. 3, the discharge passage panel and control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the lower end of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end from the front and rear. The discharge passage panel 203 has a discharge passage that is open to the rear on the surface facing the control device assembly unit 204, and the open part of the discharge passage is blocked by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge game balls to the island equipment of the game hall, and the game balls led to the discharge passage from the above-mentioned collection passage etc. are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by passing through the discharge passage.

The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base on which the payout control device 181 and the power supply/launch control device 191 are mounted. The payout control device 181 and the power supply/launch control device 191 are stacked one behind the other so that the payout control device 181 is at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

In the payout control device 181, a payout control board that controls the payout device 222 is housed in a board box, and a status return switch provided on the payout control board protrudes outside the board box. For example, when the status return switch is pressed in the event of a payout error, such as a ball jam in the payout device 222, the ball jam is cleared.

The power supply and launch control device 191 has a power supply and launch control board housed in a board box, which generates and outputs the specified power required by various control devices, etc., and also controls the launch of game balls in response to the player's operation of the game ball launch handle 41. The power supply and launch control device 191 is also provided with a RAM erase switch. This pachinko machine 10 has a function for storing and holding various types of data, so that in the event of a power outage, the state at the time of the power outage can be retained, and when the power is restored, the state at the time of the power outage can be restored. Therefore, for example, if the power is cut off in the normal manner, such as when an amusement hall closes, the state before the power outage is stored and held, but if the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch, the RAM data is initialized.

In this embodiment, the configuration of the second operational ball entry section 63 and the variable winning devices 64 and 65 arranged on the right route is characteristic. Most of the game balls that are launched to the right route and pass through the right-side operational ball entry section 62R head toward the ball entry unit 300 arranged downstream of the right-side operational ball entry section 62R on the right route. The ball entry unit 300 is an integrated unit of the second operational ball entry section 63 and the variable winning devices 64 and 65 described above. Below, we will provide additional information about the ball entry unit 300 with reference to the schematic diagrams of Figures 5 to 7. Figure 5 is a front view of the ball entry unit 300, Figure 6(a) is a perspective view of the first variable winning device 64 seen from the front side, Figure 6(b) is a schematic diagram showing the passage structure in the first variable winning device 64, and Figure 7 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the passage length and the time required for passage.

(Goal entry unit 300)
The ball entry unit 300 has a housing 320 in which a ball passage 321 that constitutes a part of the right route (specifically, the downstream area) is formed, and the housing 320 is fixed to the game board 60 in a state where it bulges forward from the front surface of the game board 60. The ball passage 321 extends from the outside (right side) of the game area PE to the center (left side). In the upper right part of the bulging part of the housing 320, an entrance part 321a of the ball entry unit 300 (ball passage 321) is formed so as to face upward, and in the lower left part, an exit part 321b of the ball entry unit 300 (ball passage 321) is formed so as to face left.

The exit portion 321b is located directly below the lower operating ball entry portion 62L that constitutes the first operating ball entry portion 62, and the game ball that flows out from the exit portion 321b is guided below the lower operating ball entry portion 62L. This prevents the game ball that has passed through the ball passage 321 from entering the lower operating ball entry portion 62L.

The housing 320 is made of a transparent synthetic resin and is configured so that the inside of the housing 320 (e.g., the game balls flowing down the ball passage 321) can be seen from the front of the gaming machine. Incidentally, in order to emphasize the unity of the second operating ball entry section 63 and the variable winning devices 64, 65, the housing 320 may be made opaque so that the internal structure is difficult or impossible to see.

The right route branches into two flow paths above the ball entry unit 300. That is, it branches into an inner route where the game ball flows down toward the entrance portion 321a of the ball passage 321, and an outer route where the game ball flows down along the upper surface of the ball entry unit 300 (housing 320).

A second actuation ball entry section 63 is disposed at the top of the housing 320 with the second actuation port 63a facing the center (left side) of the play area PE, and some of the game balls flowing down the outer route flow into the second actuation port 63a. Game balls that pass through this outer route are also guided downstream (lower) than the lower actuation ball entry section 62L that constitutes the first actuation ball entry section 62, preventing game balls that pass through the outer route from entering the lower actuation ball entry section 62L.

The above-mentioned ball passage 321 has a prescribed passage width and passage height so that multiple game balls cannot pass through the same place at the same time, and is formed in a crank shape so that a step occurs at a midway point in the passage direction. Specifically, the ball passage 321 has a horizontally long upstream passage section 322 that constitutes the upstream part of the ball passage 321 and slopes downward toward the center of the gaming machine, and a horizontally long downstream passage section 324 that constitutes the downstream part of the ball passage 321 and slopes downward toward the center of the gaming machine, which are offset vertically and horizontally so that a difference in height occurs so that the former is on the upper side and the latter is on the lower side, and the upstream passage section 322 and downstream passage section 324 are connected by a vertically extending intermediate passage section 323 (corresponding to a "connecting passage section").

The first variable winning device 64 is provided in the upstream passage 322. Specifically, the first large winning opening 331 of the first variable winning device 64 is open upward, and the upstream passage 322 is formed to cross above the first large winning opening 331. The first variable winning device 64 has a shutter 333 as an opening/closing means for opening and closing the first large winning opening 331, and a drive unit 332 (solenoid) for the shutter 333. The shutter 333 can slide back and forth (in the thickness direction of the game board 60) and is connected to the drive unit 332 via a power transmission mechanism.

The drive unit 332 is connected to the main control unit 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main control unit 162. In a non-driven state (non-excited state) where no drive signal is output from the main control unit 162, the shutter 333 is positioned in a closed position covering the first large prize opening 331 from above, and when a drive signal is output and the drive unit 332 enters a driven state (excited state), the shutter 333 moves (retreats) to an open position where it does not cover the first large prize opening 331.

When the shutter 333 is in the closed position, the shutter 333 forms the bottom of the upstream passage 322, i.e., the rolling surface of the game ball. In detail, as shown in FIG. 6(a), the housing 320 is provided with an upstream bottom 322a that forms the bottom upstream of the first large prize opening 331 in the passage direction of the upstream passage 322, and a downstream bottom 322b that forms the bottom downstream of the first large prize opening 331, and the rolling surface of the game ball is formed by the upstream bottom 322a, the downstream bottom 322b, and the shutter 333. In the following description, the area in the upstream passage 322 where the flow path is formed (complemented) by the shutter 333, i.e., the area in the upstream passage 322 facing the first large prize opening 331 across the shutter 333, is referred to as the "first specific area SE1" (see FIG. 5).

When the shutter 333 is in the open position and the upstream passage portion 322 (more specifically, the rolling surface) is cut off, the game ball that reaches the first specific area SE1 has difficulty moving in the passage direction of the upstream passage portion 322, and will flow into the first large prize opening 331.

In this embodiment, the first specific area SE1 is designed to decelerate the game ball passing through the first specific area SE1, thereby increasing the chances of winning at the first large prize opening 331. This design will be explained below with reference to FIG. 6(b). In FIG. 6(b), the path (flow path) through which the game ball passes is illustrated by a dashed line.

The front wall 335 and rear wall 336 that define the passage of the upstream passage 322 in the housing 320 are provided with protrusions 335a, 336a that protrude toward the first specific area SE1. The protrusions 335a, 336a extend vertically perpendicular to the passage direction of the upstream passage 322. In the following description, the protrusion 335a provided on the front wall 335 is referred to as the "front protrusion 335a," and the protrusion 336a provided on the rear wall 336 is referred to as the "rear protrusion 336a."

The gap dimension D1 between the rear wall 336 and the front protrusion 335a is set to be larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball, and the gap dimension D2 between the front wall 335 and the rear protrusion 336a is also set to be larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball. The front protrusions 335a are arranged in a plurality (two in this embodiment) in the passage direction (guide direction) of the upstream passage 322, with a gap larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball, and the rear protrusions 336a are arranged in a plurality (two in this embodiment) in the passage direction (guide direction) of the upstream passage 322, with a gap larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball. The front protrusions 335a and the rear protrusions 336a are arranged alternately, so that the flow path of the game ball snakes back and forth with respect to the passage direction of the upstream passage 322.

The sum of the amount of protrusion of the front protrusion 335a, the amount of protrusion of the rear protrusion 336a, and the diameter dimension D of the game ball is configured to be greater than the passage width of the upstream passage 322 (D3 < D). This prevents the game ball from running through the first specific area SE1 while avoiding collision with the protrusions 335a, 336a.

A game ball passing through the upstream passage section 322 collides with the protrusions 335a, 336a. This collision reduces (slows down) the speed at which the game ball moves in the first specific area SE1. In other words, the first specific area SE1 of the upstream passage section 322 functions as a deceleration section that forcibly decelerates the game ball. By configuring the game ball to decelerate as it passes through the upstream passage section 322 in this way, the time it takes for the game ball to pass through the first specific area SE1 is extended compared to when the protrusions 335a, 336a are defective.

The protrusions 335a and 336a are biased toward the middle passage section 323 in the first specific area SE1. This causes the game ball to decelerate immediately upstream of the middle passage section 323.

The game balls that do not flow into the first large winning port 331 continue to move along the ball passage 321, and most of them reach the downstream passage section 324. Now, referring again to FIG. 5, the downstream passage section 324 and the associated second variable winning device 65 will be described.

The second large prize opening 341 of the second variable prize winning device 65 is open upward, and a downstream passage section 324 is formed so as to cross above the second large prize opening 341. The second variable prize winning device 65 has a shutter 343 as an opening/closing means for opening and closing the second large prize opening 341, and a drive section (solenoid) for the shutter 343. The shutter 343 can slide back and forth (in the thickness direction of the game board 60) and is connected to the drive section via a power transmission mechanism.

The drive unit for the shutter 343 is connected to the main control unit 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main control unit 162. In a non-driven state (non-excited state) where no drive signal is output from the main control unit 162, the shutter 343 is positioned in a closed position that covers the second large prize opening 341 from above, and when a drive signal is output and the drive unit is put into a driven state (excited state), the shutter 343 moves (retreats) to an open position where it does not cover the second large prize opening 341.

When the shutter 343 is in the closed position, the shutter 343 forms the bottom of the downstream passage 324, i.e., the rolling surface of the game ball. In more detail, the housing 320 is provided with a downstream bottom that forms the bottom downstream of the second large winning opening 341 in the passage direction of the downstream passage 324, and the rolling surface of the game ball is formed by the downstream bottom and the shutter 343. In the following explanation, the area in the downstream passage 324 where the flow path is formed (complemented) by the shutter 343, i.e., the area in the downstream passage 324 facing the second large winning opening 341 across the shutter 343, is referred to as the "second specific area SE2."

When the shutter 343 is in the open position and the downstream passage portion 324 (more specifically, the rolling surface) is cut off, the game ball that reaches the second specific area SE2 has difficulty moving in the passage direction of the downstream passage portion 324, and will flow into the second large prize opening 341.

In addition, the second specific area SE2 may also be provided with a deceleration section consisting of multiple protrusions, similar to the first specific area SE, to decelerate the game ball passing through the second specific area SE2.

The intermediate passage section 323 described above extends upward from the upstream end of the shutter 343. The left passage wall surface that forms the intermediate passage section 323 is located on an extension of the upstream passage section 322, and the game ball that passes through the upstream passage section 322 changes direction when it collides with the left passage wall surface, and falls down the intermediate passage section 323 toward the shutter 343.

An opening through which game balls can pass is formed in the right passage wall that forms the intermediate passage section 323, and some of the game balls that pass through the intermediate passage section 323 flow into this opening. Between the right-side operating ball entry section 62R and the second variable winning device 65, a discharge passage is formed that discharges the game balls that flow into the opening from the ball entry unit 300. Some of the game balls that flow down the ball passage 321 will be discharged from the ball entry unit 300 through the opening → discharge passage before reaching the second variable winning device 65 (shutter 343). Note that game balls that pass through this discharge passage are guided directly to the back side of the game board 60, and are therefore prevented from moving to the outlet 68.

Next, referring to Figure 7, we will provide additional explanation on the relationship between the passage length of each part of the ball passage 321 and the time required for the game ball to pass through. Figure 7 is a schematic diagram of the internal structure of the ball entry unit 300 seen from the front. In the following explanation, the time required to pass through the first specific area SE1 is referred to as "required time T1", and the time required to pass through the second specific area SE2 is referred to as "required time T2".

The degree of deceleration in the first specific area SE1 is specified as follows. That is, the time T1 required for the game ball to pass through the first specific area SE1 is specified to be longer than the launch period of the game ball (0.6 sec).

Of the game balls launched into the right route, those that pass through the second operating ball entry section 63 are distributed to the inner and outer routes. Almost all of the game balls distributed into the inner route reach the first specific area SE1. Here, the time T1 required for the game ball to pass through the first specific area SE1 is set to be twice the game ball launch cycle (0.6 sec) and longer than the interval time between rounds in the special game state (1.5 sec) (more precisely, 1.8 sec). This is a measure to prevent the loss of game balls that reach the first variable winning device 64 during the interval between rounds in the special game state.

The second specific area SE2 is formed so that the passage length when viewed from the front of the gaming machine is longer than the first specific area SE1, but the required time T2 required for the gaming ball to pass through the second specific area SE2 is longer than the launch cycle of the gaming ball (0.6 sec), but is specified to be shorter than the required time T1 (more specifically, 0.8 sec). This is a measure to make the winning probability of the second variable winning device 65 lower than that of the first variable winning device 64. When the second variable winning device 65 is opened in a special gaming state (open/close execution mode) corresponding to the low frequency winning mode, the number of winnings is approximately one.

(Electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The main control board 601 provided in the main control device 162 is equipped with an MPU 602. The MPU 602 is an element that incorporates a ROM 603 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 602, a RAM 604 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 603, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as random number generators, etc. Note that some of the functions of the MPU 602, such as the functions of the ROM 603 and the RAM 604, may be configured to be provided as separate elements.

The MPU 602 is provided with an input port and an output port. The power failure monitoring board 605, the payout control device 181, various detection sensors, etc., provided in the main control device 162 are connected to the input side of the MPU 602. The power failure monitoring board 605 is connected to the power supply/launch control device 191, and the MPU 602 is supplied with power through the power failure monitoring board 605. In addition, as part of the various detection sensors, a detection sensor 391a for the general winning port 61, a detection sensor 391b for the first operating ball entry section 62, a detection sensor 391c for the second operating ball entry section 63, a detection sensor 391d for the first variable winning device 64, a detection sensor 391e for the second variable winning device 65, and a detection sensor 391f for the through gate 66 are connected, and based on the detection information (detection signals) from these various detection sensors 391a to 391f, the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 executes a winning judgment (ball entry judgment) for each ball entry section. In addition, the MPU 602 executes a lottery to determine whether a jackpot occurs based on the winnings in the first actuation ball entry section 62 (first actuation port 62a) and the second actuation ball entry section 63 (second actuation port 63a).

The output side of the MPU 602 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 605, the payout control device 181, and the notification/presentation control device 143 (more specifically, the notification/presentation control board 651). The payout control device 181 outputs a prize ball command based on the winning judgment result for the winning ball entry section. In this case, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referenced when outputting the prize ball command. If a win is identified in the general winning port 61, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output; if a win is identified in the first large winning port 331, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 12 game balls is output; if a win is identified in the second large winning port 341, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 6 game balls is output; if a win is identified in the first operating port 62a, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 3 game balls is output; and if a win is identified in the second operating port 63a, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 1 game ball is output.

The notification/performance control device 143 outputs various commands such as a change start command, a type command, a change end command, an opening command, and an ending command. In this case, when outputting these various commands, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referenced. Details of these various commands will be explained later. Each of the above commands is configured as a predetermined number of bytes of information, and various information is included as the predetermined number of bytes of information.

Also, the output side of the MPU 602 is connected to the drive unit 72 that drives the electric device 71 attached to the right-side operating ball entry unit 62R, the variable entry drive unit 451 that drives the shutter 333 of the first variable entry device 64, the variable entry drive unit 461 that drives the shutter 343 of the second variable entry device 65, the main display unit 81, etc. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 601, and the MPU 602 controls the drive of the various drive units, etc. through these driver circuits.

In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 602 controls the drive of the variable winning drive unit 451 of the first variable winning device 64 and the variable winning drive unit 461 of the second variable winning device 65 so that the first large winning opening 331 and the second large winning opening 341 are opened and closed. Also, for example, during each game round, the MPU 602 controls the display of the first operating opening display unit D1 and the second operating opening display unit D2 in the main display unit D of the main display unit 81.

Furthermore, an external terminal board 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 602. The external terminal board 213 is provided with a jackpot signal output terminal and the like as an output terminal for outputting a signal when a state transition occurs. For example, when the game result is a jackpot, the MPU 602 can output a jackpot signal through the jackpot signal output terminal to the management and control device on the gaming hall side. Specifically, under normal circumstances, a LOW level signal is output from the jackpot signal output terminal, and when a jackpot result occurs, a HI level signal is output. Note that the output mode of this signal may be reversed.

The power failure monitoring board 605 relays between the main control board 601 and the power supply and launch control device 191, and also monitors the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 191. The payout control device 181 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls by the payout device 222 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

The power supply/launch control device 191 is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in, for example, an amusement park. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, it generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 601, the payout control device 181, etc., and supplies the generated operating power through a specified power path.

The power supply/launch control device 191 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launching mechanism 110, and the game ball launching mechanism 110 (more specifically, the solenoid 111) is driven when a predetermined launch condition is met. More specifically, the power supply/launch control device 191 is connected to an operation level detection sensor and a touch sensor provided on the game ball launching handle 41. The operation level detection sensor is a sensor that detects the operation amount (rotation amount) of the game ball launching handle 41, and the launch strength (launch speed) of the game ball by the game ball launching mechanism 110 is determined based on information from this operation level detection sensor. The touch sensor is configured to output information when the player touches the game ball launching handle 41, and the power supply/launch control device 191 is configured to be able to determine whether the player is touching the game ball launching handle 41 based on this information. Based on information from the touch sensor, it is determined that the player is touching the game ball launch handle 41, and if the operation level detection sensor determines that the game ball launch handle 41 is being operated, the launch of the game ball is permitted.

The information from the touch sensor is transmitted via the power supply and launch control device 191 to the main control device 162, the notification and performance control device 143, and the display control device 710.

The notification/performance control device 143 has a notification/performance control board 651 equipped with an MPU 652, which contains a ROM 653 that stores various control programs and fixed value data, and a RAM 654, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 653 are executed.

The notification/performance control device 143 drives and controls the lamps 26-28 and speaker 29 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162, and also controls the display control device 710. In more detail, the notification/performance control device 143 determines the variable display mode of the patterns on the pattern display device 75 and the stopped display mode of the patterns that will ultimately be stopped and displayed (for example, the type of pattern combination) based on various commands input from the main control device 162, determines whether or not a reach will occur and the content of the reach performance, and transfers the determined content to the above command to the display control device 710.

The display control device 710 has a display control board equipped with an MPU, which contains a ROM that stores various control programs and fixed value data, a RAM that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM, a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM that stores image data, and a video RAM that temporarily stores image data read from the character ROM. The MPU controls the display of the variable display unit 67 (more specifically, the pattern display device 75) based on commands input from the notification/performance control device 143.

Here, we will explain the display contents of the pattern display device 75. Three pattern rows, left, center, and right, are set in the central part (variable display area) of the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75. On the display screen 75a, the patterns of each of these pattern rows are displayed variably, scrolling periodically in a predetermined direction (for example, from top to bottom).

The display screen 75a is also designed so that one symbol is displayed statically for each symbol row, for a total of three symbols. The display stops in the order of right symbol row → left symbol row → center symbol row, and when the display of all symbol rows ends with a predetermined symbol combination formed on the active line, a video or the like is displayed indicating a transition to a special game state corresponding to the result of a jackpot or special win.

In light of the fact that the variable display of each pattern row is stopped as described above, the left pattern row can be called the first pattern row (or first picture row), the right pattern row can be called the second pattern row (or second picture row), and the center pattern row can be called the third pattern row (or third picture row).

Incidentally, the manner in which the pattern display device 75 changes is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, and the number of pattern rows, the direction of the changing display of the patterns in the pattern rows, the number of patterns in each pattern row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. For example, multiple pattern rows can be set to be arranged vertically, and the direction of the changing display of the patterns in the pattern rows can be set to be horizontal.

The display of changing/stopping the patterns in the center of the display screen 75a is configured to switch between a mode corresponding to the game round related to the first actuation port 62a and a mode corresponding to the game round related to the second actuation port 63a depending on the type of normal game state. Specifically, in the first normal game state and the third normal game state described below, the display of changing/stopping the patterns in the center of the display screen 75a corresponds to the game round related to the first actuation port 62a, and in the second normal game state, the display of changing/stopping the patterns in the center of the display screen 75a corresponds to the game round related to the second actuation port 63a.

A reserve display area is set at the bottom of the display screen 75a. The reserve display area is partitioned so that the same number of unit reserve display areas as the maximum number of reserved balls that can be reserved when game balls enter the first actuation port 62a are lined up in the left-right direction, and is composed of a reserve number display area for the first actuation port that can individually display a specified reserve image (reserve icon), and an execution target display area that can display a specified reserve image (reserve icon) for the game to be executed.

Specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the first operating port 62a is four, and the first unit reserved display area, the second unit reserved display area, the third unit reserved display area, and the fourth unit reserved display area are set in the reserved number display area for the first operating port accordingly. For example, when the number of reserved balls is one when a game ball enters the first operating port 62a, a predetermined reserved image (reserved icon) is displayed in the first unit reserved display area, and when the number of reserved balls is four when a game ball enters the first operating port 62a, a predetermined reserved image (reserved icon) is displayed in all of the first unit reserved display area to the fourth unit reserved display area. Note that these reserved images are switched between displayed and hidden depending on the type of game state (first normal game state to third normal game state, which will be described later). Specifically, in the first and third normal game states in which the game play related to the first actuation port 62a is the main play, a predetermined hold image (hold icon) is displayed, whereas in the second normal game state in which the game play related to the second actuation port 63a is the main play, the predetermined hold image (hold icon) is not displayed.

(Regarding various counters)
Next, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 9, the configuration relating to the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

The MPU 602 uses various counter information during play to draw a transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode), set the display of the main display unit 81 (main display section D), set the pattern display of the pattern display device 75, and so on. Specifically, it uses a winning random number counter C1 used to draw a big win or special win, a winning type counter C2 used to determine the type of big win when a big win occurs, a reach random number counter C3 used to draw a reach display when the pattern display device 75 misses and changes, a random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and a change type counter CS that determines the change display time of the patterns in the operation openings D1 and D2 of the main display unit 81 and the change display time of the patterns in the pattern display device 75. In addition, it uses an opening random number counter C4 used to draw a lottery (support lottery) on whether or not to open the electric role 71 attached to the right-side operating ball entrance section 62R.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after it reaches its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 631 set in a specified area of the RAM 604.

RAM 604 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 632 consisting of a reserved area Ra for the first actuation port, a first execution area AE1 for the first actuation port, and a second execution area AE2 for the second actuation port. In this reserved ball storage area 632, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in chronological order according to the winning history of game balls entering the first actuation port 62a or the second actuation port 63a.

Regarding each counter in detail, the winning random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of "0" to "599", for example, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 599). In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = "0" to "599"). The winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62a or the second actuation port 63a. More specifically, it is stored in the first actuation port reserved area Ra of the RAM 604 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62a, and is stored in the second execution area AE2 of the RAM 604 when the game ball enters the second actuation port 63a.

The random number values for winning the jackpot and the special jackpot are stored as a win/lose table (win/lose information group) in a win/lose table storage area 621, which serves as a win/lose information group storage means in ROM 603. The contents of the win/lose table will now be described with reference to the schematic diagrams of Figures 10 and 11. As win/lose tables, a win/lose table group for the first actuation port 62a (see Figure 10) and a win/lose table for the second actuation port 63a (see Figure 11) are provided, and the win/lose table for the first actuation port 62a is referenced in a lottery based on a ball entering the first actuation port 62a, and the win/lose table for the second actuation port 63a is referenced in a lottery based on a ball entering the second actuation port 63a.

(First operating port hit/miss table)
With reference to Fig. 10(a), a case where the lottery mode is the low probability mode will be described. When the winning/losing table for the low probability mode is referenced in the above lottery, the number of random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a big win is 2, the number of random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a special win is 300, and the other values correspond to a losing result. As a result, the probability of a big win is 2/600, the probability of a special win is 300/600, and the probability of a losing result is 298/600.

Next, referring to FIG. 10(b), a case where the lottery mode is the high probability mode will be described. When the win/lose table for the high probability mode is referenced in the above lottery, the number of random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot win is 20, the number of random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a special win is 300, and any values other than these correspond to a losing result. This results in a jackpot probability of 20/600, a special win probability of 300/600, and a losing probability of 280/600.

(Win/loose table for second operating port)
With reference to Fig. 11(a), a case where the lottery mode is the low probability mode will be described. When the winning/losing table for the low probability mode is referenced in the lottery, the number of random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a big win is two, and the number of random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a special win is zero, and the values other than these correspond to losing results. As a result, the probability of winning a big win is 2/600, the probability of winning a special win is 0/600, and the probability of losing is 598/600.

Next, referring to FIG. 11(b), a case where the lottery mode is the high probability mode will be described. When the win/lose table for the high probability mode is referenced during the lottery, the number of random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot win is 20, the number of random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a special win is 0, and any random number value other than these corresponds to a losing result. This results in a jackpot probability of 20/600, a special win probability of 0/600, and a losing probability of 580/600.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 9, the winning type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of "0" to "999" and to return to 0 after it reaches the maximum value (i.e., "999"). The winning type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62a or the second actuation port 63a. More specifically, it is stored in the first actuation port reserved area Ra of the RAM 604 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62a, and is stored in the second execution area AE2 of the RAM 604 when the game ball enters the second actuation port 63a.

The allocation destination of the game result for the hit type counter C2 is stored as an allocation table (allocation information group) in the allocation table storage area 622, which serves as an allocation information group storage means in the ROM 603. In this embodiment, the type of the jackpot result is determined by referring to the hit type counter C2 and the allocation table. The types of jackpots provided are 2R special jackpot, 10R special jackpot A, and 10R special jackpot B.

The allocation table for each operating port is stored for each type of normal game state. Here, the types of normal game states are explained. The normal game states are composed of a first normal game state (so-called normal) in which the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode by the electric device 71 is a low frequency support mode, a second normal game state (so-called guaranteed win) in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode by the electric device 71 is a high frequency support mode, and a third normal game state (so-called potential win) in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode by the electric device 71 is a low frequency support mode. These first to third normal game states are switched through special game states corresponding to the big win result, etc.

(First operating port sorting table)
As shown in FIG. 12(a), the allocation table for the first operating port is broadly divided into an allocation table for the first normal gaming state, an allocation table for the second normal gaming state, and an allocation table for the third normal gaming state.

For the allocation table for the first normal game state, of the winning type counter C2 values of "0" to "999", a total of 665 values (first result) from "0" to "664" correspond to a 2R special jackpot, a total of 333 values (second result) from "665" to "997" correspond to a 10R special jackpot A, and a total of 2 values (third result) from "998" to "999" correspond to a 10R special jackpot A.

For the allocation table for the second normal game state, of the winning type counter C2 values of "0" to "999", a total of 665 values (first result) from "0" to "664" correspond to a 2R special jackpot, a total of 333 values (second result) from "665" to "997" correspond to a 10R special jackpot A, and a total of 2 values (third result) from "998" to "999" correspond to a 10R special jackpot A.

For the allocation table for the third normal game state, of the winning type counter C2 values of "0" to "999", a total of 665 values (first result) from "0" to "664" correspond to a 2R special jackpot, a total of 333 values (second result) from "665" to "997" correspond to a 2R special jackpot, and a total of 2 values (third result) from "998" to "999" correspond to a 10R special jackpot A.

In this embodiment, the probability of a jackpot occurring when a jackpot result is determined by a lottery based on the ball entering the first operating port 62a is 100%.

(Distribution table for second operating port)
As shown in FIG. 12(b), the second operating port allocation table is broadly divided into an allocation table for the first normal game state, an allocation table for the second normal game state, and an allocation table for the third normal game state.

For the allocation table for the first normal game state, out of the hit type counter C2 values of "0" to "999", a total of 1000 values from "0" to "999" correspond to the 10R certain variable jackpot B. For the allocation table for the second normal game state, out of the hit type counter C2 values of "0" to "999", a total of 1000 values from "0" to "999" correspond to the 10R certain variable jackpot A. For the allocation table for the third normal game state, out of the hit type counter C2 values of "0" to "999", a total of 1000 values from "0" to "999" correspond to the 10R certain variable jackpot B.

As shown in the schematic diagram of Figure 13, the winning mode, which is the control mode in the special game state for a 2R special jackpot, corresponds to the high frequency winning mode, and is specified so that the target to be opened is the second variable winning device 65 on the downstream side. In the special game state triggered by a 2R special jackpot, the opening time of the second variable winning device 65 becomes 8 seconds, and the round game is repeated twice (see Figure 14). In this special game state, approximately 120 prize balls are awarded to the player by continuing to fire game balls toward the right route.

The winning mode, which is the control mode in the special game state for 10R special jackpot A and 10R special jackpot B, corresponds to the high frequency winning mode, and is specified so that the opening target is the first variable winning device 64 on the upstream side. In the special game state triggered by 10R special jackpot A, the opening time of the first variable winning device 64 becomes 8 seconds, and the round game is repeated 10 times (see Figure 14). In this special game state, approximately 12,000 prize balls are awarded to the player by continuing to fire game balls toward the right route.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 13, the 2R variable probability jackpot and the 10R variable probability jackpot B are jackpots that transition to a third normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode after the special game state (opening/closing execution mode) ends. In contrast, the 10R variable probability jackpot A is a jackpot that transitions to a second normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode after the special game state (opening/closing execution mode) ends.

Regarding the special win described above, the winning mode, which is the control mode in the special game state, corresponds to the low frequency winning mode, and is specified so that the target to be opened is the downstream second variable winning device 65. In the special game state triggered by a special win, the opening time of the second variable winning device 65 is 0.8 sec, and only one round game is played (see FIG. 14). In this special game state, approximately six prize balls are awarded to the player by continuing to shoot game balls toward the right route.

Incidentally, the special win does not have the ability to change the type of normal game state. In other words, after the special game state corresponding to the special win ends, the game basically returns to the normal game state before the transition to that special game state, and is configured in such a way that it does not substantially affect the switching of the normal game state. In the following explanation, the special game state that is transitioned to in response to a jackpot will be appropriately distinguished as the "first special game state," and the special game state that is transitioned to in response to a special win will be appropriately distinguished as the "second special game state."

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 9, the reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62a or the second actuation port 63a. More specifically, it is stored in the first actuation port reserved area Ra of the RAM 604 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62a, and is stored in the second actuation port reserved area Rb of the RAM 604 when the game ball enters the second actuation port 63a. Then, it is appropriately determined whether or not to generate a reach display (reach state) based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 603.

Here, the reach display refers to a display state that makes the player think that the game is in a variable display state that is likely to result in a special display result after the variable display of the patterns (pictures) has started on the pattern display device 75 and before the stopped display result is derived and displayed, in a gaming machine that has a pattern display device 75 that is capable of displaying a variable (or changeable) pattern (picture), and in which the stopped display result after the variable display can be a special display result in a game round in which the game result corresponds to the open/close execution mode.

In other words, it is a display state in which the patterns of some of the multiple pattern rows displayed on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 are stopped to display a combination of reach patterns that may result in a combination of patterns corresponding to the occurrence of the open/close execution mode, and in this state, the patterns of the remaining pattern rows are displayed in a variable manner.

More specifically, as a preliminary step to terminating the display of changing patterns, a reach line is formed by displaying a combination of reach patterns that may result in a combination of patterns corresponding to the occurrence of an open/close execution mode on a preset effective line in the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75, and the display of changing patterns is performed using the final stopped pattern sequence while the reach line is formed.

To explain the display contents on the display screen 75a in more detail, first the display of the changing patterns in the right pattern row is terminated, and then when the display of the changing patterns in the left pattern row is terminated, a reach line is formed by the display of the numbered main patterns that make up the winning pattern combination on one of the active lines, and when the reach line is formed, the display of the changing patterns in the middle pattern row is performed, resulting in a reach display. Then, when a jackpot occurs, the display of the changing patterns in the middle pattern row is terminated by displaying the numbered main patterns that make up the winning pattern combination together with the main patterns that form the reach line as stopped on the reach line.

The reach display also includes a reach effect in which, while a reach symbol combination is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are changed and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background screen, and a reach effect is performed by reducing or hiding the reach symbol combination and displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen 75a. In addition, when a reach display is being performed or before a reach display, the decision of whether to perform a preview display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character may be made using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 602 to determine the time for which the patterns are displayed in the first actuation port display section D1 and the second actuation port display section D2 of the main display unit 81 (main display section D), and the time for which the patterns are displayed in the pattern display device 75. The variation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is also repeatedly updated during the remaining time in the normal processing. The buffer value of the variation type counter CS is obtained when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display in the first actuation port display section D1 and the second actuation port display section D2 (at the start of the pattern variation by the pattern display device 75).

The opening random number counter C4 for the electric role 71 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 249, for example, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The opening random number counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric role memory area 633 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 66. Then, at a predetermined timing, an opening lottery (support lottery) is performed to determine whether or not to control the electric role 71 to the open state by referring to the stored value of the opening random number counter C4 and the lottery table for support (win/lose information group) stored in the win/lose table memory area 621 of the ROM 603. Note that the probability of winning support in the high frequency support mode (specifically 249/250) is higher than the probability of winning support in the low frequency support mode (specifically 125/250), and the high frequency support mode is favored.

(Regarding various processes executed by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162)
Next, a description will be given of the timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed by the MPU 602 in the main control device 162 to progress the game in each game round. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 602 also executes main processing that is started when the power is turned on and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but a description of these processes will be omitted.

(Timer interrupt processing)
First, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 15. This process is started by the MPU 602 periodically (for example, at 2 msec intervals).

In step S101, a reading process of various detection sensors (for example, the above-mentioned detection sensors 391a to 391f) is executed. That is, the state of the various detection sensors connected to the main control device 162 is read, and the state of the detection sensor (detection information from the detection sensor) is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. For example, if it is determined that a win has occurred in the first operating port 62a, a win detection flag for the first operating port is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604; if it is determined that a win has occurred in the second operating port 63a, a win detection flag for the second operating port is stored in the various flag storage area 635; if it is determined that a win has occurred in the first variable winning device 64, a win detection flag for the first large winning port is stored in the various flag storage area 635; if it is determined that a win has occurred in the second variable winning device 65, a win detection flag for the lower large winning port is stored in the various flag storage area 635; and if it is determined that a win has occurred in the through gate 66, a win detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 635.

Then, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

In the following step S103, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values, they are each cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 604. After that, in step S104, a prize winning process for through is executed in response to a prize winning through gate 66.

(Winning process for skipping)
In the winning process for through in step S104, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 66. If the game ball has entered the through gate 66 and the number of reserved games SN is less than the upper limit (specifically, 4), the number of reserved games SN is incremented by 1, and the value of the open random number counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the first free memory area of the electric game memory area 633 in the RAM 604. Then, this winning process is terminated.

If it is determined that the game ball has not entered the through gate 66, or if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 66 but the number of reserved memories SN has reached the upper limit, the winning process is terminated without storing the value of the open random number counter C4.

In addition, in the winning process for through, display control processing is executed for the through gate reserved number display section SS of the main display unit 81. Specifically, light emission control processing is executed for the through gate reserved number display section SS, which is made up of four light emitters (LEDs), so that the number of light emitters equal to the number of reserved memory SN of the role objects is lit.

After executing the winning process for the through ball in step S104, the winning process for the actuation port associated with the winning at the actuation port 62a, 63a is executed in step S105, and this timer interrupt process is terminated.

(Winning process for the operating port)
In the winning process for the actuation port in step S105, first, whether or not the game ball has won (initial winning) in the first actuation ball entry section 62 (first actuation port 62a) is determined based on whether or not the winning detection flag for the first actuation port is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If it is determined that the winning detection flag is stored, that is, if a detection signal indicating that the game ball has won in the first actuation ball entry section 62 (first actuation port 62a) is received, a winning ball command for paying out two game balls is set in the payout control device 181. Then, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that the game ball has won in the first actuation ball entry section 62 (first actuation port 62a) to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC is informed that a winning has occurred in the first actuation ball entry section 62 (first actuation port 62a).

Then, the value (start-up hold memory number) stored in the hold number memory area of the hold area Ra for the first operating port is updated (increased by 1). Next, an information acquisition process is performed to store the values of the win random number counter C1, the win type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, and this winning process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the winning detection flag for the first operating port is not stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, but the winning detection flag for the second operating port is stored, a prize ball command is set in the payout control device 181 to pay out one game ball. The set prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 181 by the external output process of the normal process described below.

Next, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that a game ball has entered the second actuation ball entry section 63 (second actuation port 63a) to the hall computer HC on the gaming hall side. This allows the hall computer HC to understand that a game ball has entered the second actuation ball entry section 63 (second actuation port 63a).

After that, if there is no reserved information stored in the second execution area AE2 (i.e., if a game involving the second actuation port 63a is not in progress), an information acquisition process is performed to store the values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 in the second execution area AE2, and this winning process is terminated. Note that since this embodiment does not have a reserved function relating to the second actuation port 63a, if a new winning occurs in the second actuation port 63a while reserved information is stored in the second execution area AE2, no reserved information will be stored based on that winning.

If the game ball does not enter either the first operational ball entry section 62 or the second operational ball entry section 63, this winning process ends.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 16. Normal processing is processing that starts after main processing that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in normal processing, main processing of the game is executed. In summary, the processing of steps S201 to S207 is executed as a regular processing with a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, in step S201, output data such as commands set in the timer interrupt processing or the previous normal processing is sent to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is sent to the payout control device 181. Also, if a command for presentation such as a command corresponding to the presentation for a game round, such as a fluctuation start command, type command, or fluctuation end command, or a command corresponding to the presentation for the open/close execution mode is set, it is sent to the notification/presentation control device 143. Also, output settings for the external terminal board 213 are made according to the information set in the external output buffer of RAM 604.

Next, in step S202, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

In the next step S203, a game round control process is executed to progress each game round. In this game round control process, a win/loss determination is made, and a jackpot type allocation determination is made, and the setting of the variable display of the patterns by the pattern display device 75 and display control of the operation port display sections D1, D2, etc. in the main display unit 81 (main display section D) are also performed.

Then, in step S204, a game state transition process is executed to transition the game state. Details will be described later, but this game state transition process transitions the game state to an open/close execution mode, a high probability mode, or the like.

In the next step S205, an electric support process is executed to drive and control the electric device 71 attached to the right-side operating entrance 62R. In this electric support process, the information stored in the electric storage area of the RAM 604 is used to determine whether or not to open the electric device 71, and the electric device 71 is opened and closed, and the display of the through gate display unit DS is controlled.

In the next step S206, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid 111 of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is excited once per predetermined launch period (0.6 sec in this embodiment), provided that a launch permission signal output from the power supply/launch control device 191 is input based on the fact that a launch operation is being performed on the game ball launch handle 41. This causes the game ball to be launched toward the play area PE. In other words, if an irregular shot such as a so-called stop shot is not being performed, the launch of the game ball is repeated at a predetermined cycle, provided that a launch operation is being performed.

In the next step S207, it is determined whether a power outage flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The power outage flag is set when the power outage monitoring board 605 detects the occurrence of a power outage and inputs a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring board 605 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 602, and is cleared during the next main processing.

If the power outage flag is not set, the last of the multiple processes that are repeatedly executed has ended, so in step S208 it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived, i.e., whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, within the remaining time until the timing for executing the next normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. That is, in step S209, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S210, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated.

Here, the execution time of each process in steps S201 to S206 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the winning random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S207 that the power outage flag is set, this means that a power outage has occurred, and power outage processing from step S211 onwards is executed. Specifically, in step S211, timer interrupt processing is prohibited, and then in step S212, a RAM judgment value is calculated and saved, and in step S213, access to RAM 604 is prohibited, and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed.

(Game play control process)
Here, the game play control process in step S203 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIG. 17 to FIG. 21. As shown in FIG. 17, in the game play control process shown in this embodiment, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the special game state (opening and closing execution mode) is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an open-close execution mode flag (opening and closing execution state information) is stored (stored) in an open-close execution mode flag storage area (opening and closing execution state information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The open-close execution mode flag is stored when the game state is shifted to the open-close execution mode in the game state shift process described later, and is erased when the open-close execution mode is terminated in the game state shift process.

If a positive judgment is made in step S301, the game round control process is terminated. If a negative judgment is made in step S301, the game round control process (game round control process corresponding to the first actuation port, control process for the first actuation port) for the game round related to the winning of the first actuation ball entry section 62 (first actuation port 62a) is executed in step S302, and the game round control process (game round control process corresponding to the second actuation port, control process for the second actuation port) for the game round related to the winning of the second actuation ball entry section 63 (second actuation port 63a) is executed in step S303, and then the game round control process is terminated. The basic flow is the same for these two control processes. Below, first, the first actuation port control process will be described with reference to Figures 18 and 19, and then the second actuation port control process will be described with reference to Figures 20 and 21, focusing on the differences from the first actuation port control process.

(Control process for first operating port)
As shown in FIG. 18, in the first actuation port control process, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not a game related to the first actuation port 62a is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first actuation port display section D1 of the main display unit 81 is in a variable display to fixed display, that is, whether or not one game round is being played. This determination is made by determining whether or not a game round flag (game round information) for the first actuation port is stored (stored) in a game round flag storage area (variable display information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The game round flag for the first actuation port is stored when a variable display is started in the first actuation port display section D1, and is erased when the picture is displayed stationary and the fixed display ends.

If a game round related to the first actuation port 62a is not in progress, a negative judgment is made in step S401, and the process proceeds to step S402. In step S402, the total reserved number storage area of the reserved ball storage area 632 is referenced to judge whether the reserved memory number CRN for the first actuation port, which is the number of reserved information stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 (more specifically, the number of reserved information related to the first actuation port 62a), is "0" or not. If the reserved memory number CRN for the first actuation port is "0", the game round control process ends as is. On the other hand, if the reserved memory number CRN for the first actuation port is not "0", the process proceeds to step S403. In step S403, data setting process is performed.

In the data setting process for the first actuation port, first the reserved memory count CRN for the first actuation port is decremented by 1. After that, the data stored in the first area of the reserved area Ra for the first actuation port is moved to the first execution area AE1 (see Figure 9), and a process is executed to shift the data stored in each memory area of the reserved area Ra for the first actuation port.

This data shift process shifts the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower areas in order, clearing the data in the first area and shifting the data in each area from the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, and the fourth area to the third area. Then, one of the lit LEDs in the hold number display unit S1 for the first operating port is turned off. In this light-off process, the LEDs in the hold number display unit S1 for the first operating port are turned off in order from the bottom, in the opposite order to the light-on process that is executed when hold information is added.

After the data setting process described above is performed, in step S404, a change start process for the first actuation port (change start process for the first actuation port) is executed to start the change display of the image in the first actuation port display section D1 and the change display of the image in the pattern display device 75, and then this game round control process is terminated. Here, the change start process for the first actuation port in step S404 will be described with reference to FIG. 19.

(First operating port fluctuation start process)
In the first operation port variation start process, first, a win/loss determination process is executed in step S501. In the win/loss determination process, the win/loss table for the first operation port is referenced to determine whether the win/loss determination information stored in the first execution area AE1, i.e., the numerical information obtained from the win random number counter C1, matches the numerical information for the jackpot or the numerical information for the special win described above. If the determination result in step S501 is a jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S502 and the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, a type determination process is executed. In the type determination process, the type determination information stored in the first execution area AE1, i.e., the numerical information obtained from the hit type counter C2, is grasped. In addition, by referring to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of the ROM 603, it is determined in which of the information groups corresponding to the first to third results the above-mentioned determined type determination information is included, i.e., in which of the information groups corresponding to the 2R special jackpot and the 10R special jackpot A.

In step S504, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the image to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section D (first operating port display section D1) of the main display unit 81 in the relevant game round is specified from a stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in ROM 603, and the specified information is stored in RAM 604. A plurality of images to be stopped and displayed on the main display section D are set in this stop result table for the jackpot result, and in step S504, information indicating the image corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in RAM 604. Also, in step S504, information for the MPU 602 to specify whether the current game result is a 2R special jackpot or a 10R special jackpot A is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604. Specifically, if it is a 2R special jackpot, a 2R special jackpot flag is stored, and if it is a 10R special jackpot A, a 10R special jackpot flag A is stored.

In addition, although details will be described later, in this embodiment, an upper limit is set for the number of consecutive jackpots corresponding to the transition to the high frequency support mode and the number of consecutive jackpots corresponding to the transition to the high probability mode (so-called limiters). The MPU 602 refers to the value of the consecutive number counter provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 and determines whether the number of consecutive jackpots corresponding to the transition to the high frequency support mode has reached the upper limit due to the current jackpot result.

Returning to the explanation of step S501, if the determination in step S501 results in a special win, a negative determination is made in step S502 and a positive determination is made in step S505, and the process proceeds to step S506. In step S506, a stop result setting process for a special win result is executed. Specifically, the image to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section D (first operating port display section D1) of the main display unit 81 in the relevant game round is identified from a stop result table for a special win result stored in advance in ROM 603, and the identified information is stored in RAM 604. A plurality of images to be stopped and displayed on the main display section D are set in this stop result table for a special win result, and in step S506, information indicating the image corresponding to the special win result is stored in RAM 604. In addition, in step S506, a special win flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604 as information for the MPU 602 to identify that the current game result is a special win result.

Also, if the result of the judgment in step S501 is a loss, negative judgments are made in steps S502 and S505, and the process proceeds to step S507. In step S507, a process for setting a stop result for a loss result is executed. Specifically, the image to be finally displayed on the main display section D (first operating port display section D1) of the main display unit 81 in the relevant game round is identified from a stop result table for a loss result stored in advance in ROM 603, and the identified information is stored in RAM 604. In this stop result table for a loss result, multiple images to be displayed on the main display section D are set, and in step S506, information indicating the image corresponding to the loss result is stored in RAM 604. In addition, in step S506, a loss flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604 as information for the MPU 602 to identify that the current game result is a loss result.

After executing the setting processes of steps S504, S506, and S507, the process proceeds to step S508. In step S508, a setting process of the variable display time (display duration) is executed. Details of this setting process will be described later. After executing the setting process of the variable display time in step S508, a variable start command and a type command are set in step S509. The variable start command includes information on the variable display time. As described above, the variable display time obtained by referring to the variable display time table for non-reach occurrence is different from the variable display time obtained by referring to the variable display time table for reach occurrence. Therefore, even if the variable start command does not include information on whether or not a reach has occurred, the notification/performance control device 143, which is the control device on the sub side, can identify whether or not a reach has occurred from the information on the variable display time. In this regard, it can be said that the variable start command includes information indicating whether or not a reach has occurred. Incidentally, the variable start command may include information directly indicating whether or not a reach has occurred.

After executing the setting process of step S509, the process proceeds to step S510, where the variable display of the first actuation port display section D1 on the main display unit 81 is started, and then the variable display start process for the first actuation port is terminated. In the process of step S510, a game turn flag for the first actuation port is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. This makes it possible to identify in subsequent processes that a game turn (e.g., variable display) related to the first actuation port 62a is currently being executed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 18, if a positive judgment is made in step S401, i.e., if it is judged that a game round related to the first actuation port 62a is in progress, the process proceeds to step S405. In step S405, it is judged whether or not a confirmation display is being executed in a game round related to the first actuation port 62a. If a positive judgment is made in step S405, the process for the first actuation port ends as is. If a negative judgment is made in step S405, the process proceeds to step S406. In step S406, it is judged whether or not it is the timing to stop and display a pattern corresponding to the jackpot result in a game round related to the second actuation port 63a. If a negative judgment is made in step S406, the process proceeds to step S407.

In step S407, it is determined whether the timing has passed the variable display time set in step S508. If a negative determination is made in step S407, variable display processing is executed in step S408, and then the first actuation port control processing is terminated. In the variable display processing in step S408, the various LEDs constituting the first actuation port display section D1 are turned on and off, thereby causing the image to be displayed variably.

If a positive judgment is made in step S407, the process proceeds to step S410. In step S410, a change end process is executed. In the change end process, the display of the main display unit 81 is controlled so that the image is stopped and displayed in the first actuation port display section D1 in a manner determined in advance. That is, for example, a final display of an image corresponding to the lottery result (game result) is executed. In addition, a final display flag for the first actuation port is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. This final display flag is a flag that is erased when the final display ends, and in the process of step S405, it is determined whether or not the final display is being performed based on the presence or absence of the final display flag.

After setting the variation end command in the following step S412, this game round control process ends. The variation end command set in step S412 is sent to the notification/presentation control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 17). The notification/presentation control device 143 executes a process to end the presentation for that game round based on receiving the variation end command. The variation end command is also sent to the display control device 710 via the notification/presentation control device 143, and by receiving the variation end command, the display control device 710 displays a combination of patterns corresponding to the game result of that game round on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 (final stop display). Note that the variation end command may not be sent, and the notification/presentation control device 143 or the display control device 710 may end the presentation for the game round independently.

Returning to the explanation of step S406, if a positive judgment is made in step S406, that is, if it is time to stop and display the image corresponding to the jackpot result in the game round related to the second actuation port 63a, the process proceeds to step S409. In step S409, a rewrite process of the stopped image is executed. Specifically, regardless of whether the current game round is a jackpot result, a special win result, or a miss result, the stopped result (game result) is rewritten to a miss result. In other words, if a game round corresponding to the jackpot result related to the second actuation port 63a is played in parallel with a game round related to the first actuation port 62a, if the game round related to the second actuation port 63a ends first, the game round related to the first actuation port 62a is forcibly ended so that the game round is a miss result. After the rewrite process of step S409 is executed, the processes of steps S410 to S411 are executed, and then the control process for the first actuation port is terminated.

Next, the control process for the second operating port will be described with reference to Figures 20 and 21.

(Control process for second operating port)
As shown in FIG. 20, in the second actuation port control process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not a game related to the second actuation port 63a is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second actuation port display section D2 of the main display unit 81 is in a variable display to fixed display, that is, whether or not one game is being played. This determination is made by determining whether or not a game-in-progress flag (variable display information) for the second actuation port is stored (stored) in a game-in-progress flag storage area (variable display information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The game-in-progress flag for the second actuation port is stored when a variable display is started on the second actuation port display section D2, and is erased when the picture is stopped and the fixed display ends.

If a game is not in progress, a negative judgment is made in step S601 and the process proceeds to step S602. In step S602, a judgment is made as to whether or not a winning bid has occurred in the second actuation port 63a. If a negative judgment is made in step S602, the control process for the second actuation port ends. If a positive judgment is made in step S602, the process proceeds to step S603. In step S603, data setting process for the second actuation port 63a is executed.

In the data setting process for the second actuation port 63a, various information obtained from the lottery counter buffer 631 is set in the second execution area AE2. After the data setting process described above is performed, in step S604, a change start process for the second actuation port (change start process for the second actuation port) is performed to start the changing display of the patterns on the main display unit 81 (main display section D) and the changing display of the patterns on the pattern display device 75, and then this game number control process is terminated.

Now, with reference to Figure 21, we will explain the second operating port fluctuation start process in step S604.

(Fluctuation start process for second operating port)
In the second operation port variation start process, first, a win/loss determination process is executed in step S701. In the win/loss determination process, by referring to the win/loss table for the second operation port, it is determined whether the information for win/loss determination among various information stored in the second execution area AE2, that is, the numerical information related to the win random number counter C1, matches the jackpot numerical information described above. If the determination result in step S701 is a jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S702 and the process proceeds to step S703.

In step S703, a type determination process is executed. In the type determination process, the type determination information among the various information stored in the second execution area AE2, i.e., the numerical information obtained from the hit type counter C2 and the allocation table stored in the allocation table storage area 622 of the ROM 603, is referenced to determine whether the above-identified type determination information is included in the information group corresponding to the 10R special jackpot A or the information group corresponding to the 10R special jackpot B.

In the next step S704, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the image to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section D (second operating port display section D2) of the main display unit 81 in the relevant game round is specified from a stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 603, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604. A plurality of images to be stopped and displayed on the main display section D are set in this stop result table for the jackpot result, and in step S704, information indicating the image corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in the RAM 604. Also, in step S704, information for the MPU 602 to specify whether the current game result is a 10R special jackpot A or a 10R special jackpot B is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. Specifically, if it is a 10R special jackpot A, the 10R special jackpot flag A is stored, and if it is a 10R special jackpot B, the 10R special jackpot flag B is stored.

Returning to the explanation of step S701, if the result of the win/loss judgment is a loss result, a negative judgment is made in step S702 and the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, a stop result setting process for a loss result is executed. Specifically, the image to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section D (second operating port display section D2) of the main display unit 81 in the relevant game round is identified from a stop result table for a loss result stored in advance in ROM 603, and the identified information is stored in RAM 604. This stop result table for a loss result has multiple images set to be stopped and displayed on the main display section D, and in step S506, information indicating the image corresponding to the loss result is stored in RAM 604. Also, in step S506, a loss flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604 as information for the MPU 602 to identify that the current game result is a loss result.

After executing the setting processes of steps S704 and S705, the process proceeds to step S706. In step S706, the process of setting the variable display time (display duration) is executed. The details of this variable display time setting process will be described later.

After executing the variable display time setting process in step S706, a variable start command and a type command are set in step S707. The variable start command includes information on the variable display time. Here, as described above, the variable display time obtained by referring to the variable display time table for when a reach does not occur is different from the variable display time obtained by referring to the variable display time table for when a reach occurs. Therefore, even if the variable start command does not include information on whether a reach has occurred, the notification/performance control device 143, which is the control device on the sub side, can determine whether a reach has occurred from the information on the variable display time. In this regard, it can be said that the variable start command includes information indicating whether a reach has occurred. Note that the variable start command may also include information directly indicating whether a reach has occurred.

After executing the setting process of step S707, the process proceeds to step S708, where the variable display of the second actuation port display section D2 on the main display unit 81 is started, and then the variable display start process for the second actuation port is terminated. In the process of step S708, a game turn flag for the second actuation port is stored in the various flags storage area 635 of the RAM 604. This makes it possible to identify in subsequent processes that a game turn (e.g., variable display) related to the second actuation port 63a is currently being executed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 20, if a positive judgment is made in step S601, that is, if it is judged that a game round related to the second actuation port 63a is in progress, the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, it is judged whether or not a confirmation display is being executed in a game round related to the second actuation port 63a. If a positive judgment is made in step S605, the process for the second actuation port ends as is. If a negative judgment is made in step S605, the process proceeds to step S606. In step S606, it is judged whether or not it is the timing to stop and display a pattern corresponding to a special winning result in a game round related to the first actuation port 62a. If a negative judgment is made in step S606, the process proceeds to step S607.

In step S607, it is determined whether it is time to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result in the game round related to the first actuation port 62a. If a negative determination is made in step S607, the process proceeds to step S608. In step S608, it is determined whether the timing has passed the variable display time set in step S706 above. If a negative determination is made in step S608, a variable display process is executed in step S609, and then the second actuation port control process is terminated. In the variable display process in step S609, the various LEDs constituting the second actuation port display section D2 are turned on and off to display the variable pattern.

If a positive judgment is made in step S608, the process proceeds to step S611. In step S611, a change end process is executed. In the change end process, the display of the main display unit 81 is controlled so that the image is stopped and displayed in the second operating port display section D2 in a manner determined in advance. That is, for example, a final display of an image corresponding to the lottery result (game result) is executed. In addition, a final display flag for the second operating port is stored in the various flags storage area 635 of the RAM 604. This final display flag is a flag that is erased when the final display ends, and in the process of step S605, it is determined whether or not the final display is being performed based on the presence or absence of the final display flag.

After setting the variation end command in the following step S612, this game round control process ends. The variation end command set in step S612 is sent to the notification/presentation control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 17). The notification/presentation control device 143 executes a process to end the presentation for that game round based on receiving the variation end command. The variation end command is also sent to the display control device 710 via the notification/presentation control device 143, and by receiving the variation end command, the display control device 710 displays a combination of patterns corresponding to the game result of that game round on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 as a final display (final stop display). Note that the variation end command may not be sent, and the notification/presentation control device 143 or the display control device 710 may end the presentation for the game round independently.

Returning to the explanation of steps S606 and S607, if a positive judgment is made in either step S606 or S607, that is, if it is time to stop and display a pattern corresponding to a jackpot result or a special miss result in the game round related to the second actuation port 63a, the process proceeds to step S610. In step S610, a rewrite process of the stopped pattern is executed. Specifically, regardless of whether the current game round is a jackpot result or a miss result, the stopped result (game result) is rewritten to a miss result. In other words, if a game round corresponding to a jackpot result related to the second actuation port 63a is played in parallel with a game round related to the second actuation port 63a, if the game round related to the first actuation port 62a ends first, the game round related to the second actuation port 63a is forcibly ended so that the game round is a miss result. After the rewrite process of step S610 is executed, the processes of steps S611 to S612 are executed, and then the control process for the second actuation port is terminated.

(Game state transition process)
Next, the game state transition process in step S204 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 22 to 26. As already described, in this embodiment, there are provided a normal game state in which the game progresses based on the ball entering the actuation openings 62a and 63a, and a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable winning devices 64 and 65 are opened. As already described, the normal game state is composed of a first normal game state in which the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode by the electric role 71 is a low frequency support mode, a second normal game state in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode by the electric role 71 is a high frequency support mode, and a third normal game state in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode by the electric role 71 is a low frequency support mode, and the first normal game state to the third normal game state are switched through a special game state corresponding to the big win result, etc.

In the game state transition process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the game is in the open/close execution mode. If the game is not in the open/close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S802, where it is determined whether or not a game round (more specifically, a confirmation display) has ended. If a game round has not ended, the game state transition process is terminated.

If the game round has ended, more specifically if the preset stop display time (fixed display time) has elapsed since the variable display ended, the process proceeds to step S803, where it is determined whether the game result of the current game round (the result of the win/lose lottery described above) corresponds to a transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode). Specifically, it is determined whether any of the above-mentioned 2R special rate flag, 10R special rate flag A, 10R special rate flag B, or special win flag is stored in RAM 604. If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition process is terminated.

If any of the above flags is stored, the opening/closing execution mode start process is executed in step S804. In this start process, first, an opening waiting time (start waiting time) is set for the opening of the opening/closing execution mode, in order to keep the variable winning devices 64, 65 waiting without starting to open the variable winning devices 64, 65. Specifically, the opening waiting time information previously stored in the ROM 603 is set in a waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604.

In this embodiment, the waiting time for the opening (opening time) differs depending on the type of win. Specifically, the waiting time for the opening when a 2R or 10R special jackpot occurs during the first normal game state is 7 seconds, the waiting time for the opening when a 2R or 10R special jackpot occurs during the second normal game state is 3 seconds, and the waiting time for the opening when a 2R or 10R special jackpot occurs during the third normal game state is 3 seconds. In contrast, the waiting time for the opening when a special win occurs is shorter regardless of the game state, specifically 8 msec.

In the next step S805, it is determined whether the current opening/closing execution mode corresponds to the jackpot result. If the determination in step S805 is positive, the process proceeds to step S806, where the round number counter RC provided in the various counter area 634 of the RAM 604 is set to a value corresponding to the current jackpot result. Specifically, if the current jackpot result is a 2R variable jackpot, the round number counter RC is set to "2", and if the current jackpot result is a 10R variable jackpot, the round number counter RC is set to "10". The round number counter RC is decremented each time a round progresses, and when the value of the round number counter RC becomes "0", the current special game state ends. After the setting process in step S806 is executed, the high frequency support mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 is erased in step S807.

Returning to the explanation of step S805, if a negative judgment is made in step S805, that is, if the special game state is triggered by a special winning result, the process proceeds to step S808. In step S808, a second winning mode flag (a flag for a low frequency winning mode) is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. After that, in step S809, the round number counter is set to "1". In the subsequent processing, it is determined that the current special game state corresponds to a special winning result based on the fact that the second winning mode flag is set.

After executing the process of step S807 or step S809, the process proceeds to step S810. In step S810, the opening command is set. This set opening command is sent to the notification/performance control device 143 and the display control device 710 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 17). The notification/performance control device 143 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and is capable of controlling various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. The content of this performance includes the display mode in the pattern display device 75, and this determined display mode is output from the notification/performance control device 143 to the display control device 710 as a display content command. The display control device 710 executes display control of the pattern display device 75 so that a display corresponding to the current opening/closing execution mode, for example, a moving image display of a character or the like as the display content corresponding to a big win, or a background image or the like is switched based on the opening command received from the main control device 162 and the display content command received from the notification/performance control device 143.

After executing the opening command setting process in step S810, the external signal setting process is executed in step S811, and this game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process in step S811, it is determined whether any of the various jackpot flags and special win flags described above are stored in RAM 604, and if any flag is stored, a signal indicating that a jackpot or special win has occurred is output to the management control device (hall computer HC) on the gaming hall side. By receiving this external signal, the management control device understands that a transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) has occurred.

Returning to the explanation of step S801, if the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, a positive determination is made in step S801, and the process proceeds to step S812. In step S812, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the large prize opening opening/closing process is executed in step S813.

Here, we will explain the big prize opening and closing process with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 23 to 25.

(Big prize opening and closing process)
As shown in Fig. 23, in the big prize opening opening and closing process, first in step S901, it is determined whether or not the second prize mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If a negative determination is made in step S901, the process proceeds to step S902, where the first opening and closing process is executed. The first opening and closing process is executed when the special game state (opening and closing execution mode) corresponding to the big prize result, i.e., the first special game state, is in effect.

(First opening and closing process)
As shown in Fig. 24, in the first opening/closing process, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the first variable winning device 64 (first large winning opening 331) is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive unit 451 of the first variable winning device 64. If the first large winning opening 331 is not open, in step S1002, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter RC is "0". If a positive determination is made in step S1002, the first opening/closing process is terminated as it is.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1002, the process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1003, it is judged whether the value of the timer counter TC1 provided in the various counter area 634 of the RAM 604 is "0". The timer counter TC1 is a counter that is referenced when determining the opening time of the first large winning opening 331, the interval time (interval time between rounds), etc., and its value is decremented by "1" each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) is executed. If a negative judgment is made in step S1003, the first opening/closing process is terminated.

If the value of the round number counter RC is not "0" and the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0", the process of steps S1004 to S1005 is executed as a process of setting the closing condition (opening setting process) for the first variable winning device 64 (first large winning opening 331). Specifically, in step S1004, the timer counter TC1 is set to "4000" (equivalent to 8 seconds), and in the following step S1005, the winning counter PC is set to "10".

In the next step S1006, it is determined whether the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a 10R special jackpot. If the determination is affirmative in step S1006, the process proceeds to step S1007, where the opening process of the first variable winning device 64 (first large winning port 331) is executed. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 451 is set to a driving state (excited state) to open the first large winning port 331. If the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a 2R special jackpot, the process proceeds to step S1008, where the opening process of the second variable winning device 65 (second large winning port 341) is executed. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 461 is set to a driving state (excited state) to open the second large winning port 341.

Then, the process proceeds to step S1009, where an opening command is set and the first opening/closing process is terminated. The opening command includes information indicating the object to be opened (first variable winning device 64 or second variable winning device 65), and this set opening command is sent to the notification/performance control device 143 in step S201 of the normal process (see FIG. 16). The notification/performance control device 143 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening based on receiving this opening command, and is capable of controlling various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed.

Returning to the explanation of step S1001, if it is determined in step S1001 that the first variable winning device 64 (first large winning opening 331) or the second variable winning device 65 (second large winning opening 341) is open, the process proceeds to step S1010. In step S1010, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC1 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1011, and it is determined whether a game ball has won the large winning opening (first large winning opening 331 or second large winning opening 341) that was to be opened based on the detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor (detection sensor 391d, 391e) attached to the variable winning device (first variable winning device 64 or second variable winning device 65).

If a win has occurred, a win command output process is executed in step S1012. The win command is output to the notification/performance control device 143, and the notification/performance control device 143 can change the display on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 based on the win command.

After executing the command output process in step S1012, the process proceeds to step S1013. In step S1013, the value of the prize counter PC is decremented by 1, and in the following step S1014, it is determined whether the value of the prize counter PC is "0" or not, and if it is not "0", the process of opening and closing the large prize opening is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1014, i.e., if the value of the winning counter PC is "0", or if a positive judgment is made in step S1010 (i.e., if it is judged that the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0"), it means that the large winning opening closing condition is met. In this case, in step S1019, the variable winning drive unit (variable winning drive unit 451, 461) is set to a non-driven state (non-excited state) to close the variable winning device (first variable winning device 64 or variable winning device 65) that is to be opened.

In the next step S1016, an update process of the round number counter RC is executed. Specifically, if the value of the round number counter RC is not "0", the round number counter RC is decremented by 1, and if the value of the round number counter RC is "0", the value of the round number counter RC is maintained as "0".

Then, in step S1017, it is determined whether the updated value of the round number counter RC is "0". If the determination in step S1017 is negative, the process proceeds to step S1018, where the timer counter TC1 is set to "750" (corresponding to 1.5 seconds).

After executing the process of step S1018, a close command is set in step S1019, and this first opening/closing process is terminated. This set close command is sent to the notification/performance control device 143 in step S201 of the normal process (Figure 17). Based on receiving this close command, the notification/performance control device 143 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the close command, and is capable of controlling various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed.

Returning to the explanation of step S1017, if it is determined in step S1017 that the value of the round number counter RC is "0", the process proceeds to step S1020. In step S1020, the process executes the ending start process. In the start process, a waiting time for the ending in the open/close execution mode is set so that the player can wait without starting the next round of play. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending, which is pre-stored in ROM 603, is set in a waiting time counter area provided in various counter areas 634 of RAM 604.

Then, in step S1021, an ending command is set, and the first opening/closing process is terminated. This set ending command is sent to the notification/performance control device 143 in step S201 of the normal process (Figure 17). Based on receiving this ending command, the notification/performance control device 143 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the ending command, and is capable of controlling various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 23, if a positive determination is made in step S901, the second opening/closing process is executed in step S903. The second opening/closing process will be explained below with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 25.

(Second opening and closing process)
In the second opening/closing process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether the second variable winning device 65 (second large winning opening 341) is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive unit 461 of the second variable winning device 65. If the second large winning opening 341 is not open, in step S1102, the opening process of the second variable winning device 65 (second large winning opening 341) is executed. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 461 is set to a drive state (excited state) to open the second large winning opening 341.

Then, steps S1103 to S1104 are executed as a process for setting the closing conditions (setting process for when the opening) for the second variable winning device 65 (second large winning opening 341). Specifically, in step S1103, the timer counter TC1 is set to "400" (corresponding to 0.8 sec), and in the following step S1104, the winning counter PC is set to "6".

Returning to the explanation of step S1101, if it is determined in step S1101 that the second variable winning device 65 (second large winning opening 341) is open, the process proceeds to step S1105, where it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC1 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1106, where it is determined whether a game ball has won the second large winning opening 341 based on a detection signal from the detection sensor 391d attached to the second variable winning device 65.

If a win has occurred, a win command output process is executed in step S1107. The win command is output to the notification/performance control device 143, and the notification/performance control device 143 can change the display on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 based on the win command.

After executing the command output process in step S1107, the process proceeds to step S1108. In step S1108, the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1, and in the following step S1109, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or not, and if it is not "0", the second opening/closing process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1109, i.e., if the value of the winning counter PC is "0", or if a positive judgment is made in step S1105 (i.e., if the value of the timer counter TC1 is judged to be "0"), this means that the large winning opening closure condition is met. In this case, in step S1110, the variable winning drive unit 461 is set to a non-driven state (non-excited state) to close the second variable winning device 65 (second large winning opening 341).

In the next step S1111, the process of starting the ending is executed. In this process, a waiting time for the ending of the opening and closing execution mode is set so that the game waits without starting the next round of play. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending, which is stored in advance in the ROM 603, is set in a waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604.

Then, in step S1112, an ending command is set, and the main prize opening/closing process is terminated. This set ending command is sent to the notification/performance control device 143 in step S201 of the normal process (Figure 17).

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 22, after executing the large prize opening/closing process of step S813, the process proceeds to step S814. In step S814, it is determined whether or not the round count counter RC is at "0". If a negative determination is made in step S814, the process proceeds to step S815. In step S815, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S814.

On the other hand, if the value of the round number counter RC is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, in step S816, the transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode is executed, and then the game state transition process is terminated. Here, the transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode is described with reference to FIG. 27.

(Transition process when closing/opening execution mode ends)
In the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether the hit that triggered the transition to the open/close execution mode this time is a hit corresponding to the high probability mode, that is, whether it is a 2R high probability jackpot, a 10R high probability jackpot A, or a 10R high probability jackpot B. If the determination is affirmative in step S1201, the process proceeds to step S1202. In step S1202, an update process is performed on the continuous number counter for the continuous probability jackpot provided in the various counter area 634 of the RAM 604. Specifically, the value of the continuous number counter for the continuous probability jackpot is incremented by "1".

In the next step S1203, it is determined whether the hit that triggered the transition to the current open/close execution mode is a hit compatible with the high frequency support mode, i.e., a 10R guaranteed special big hit A. If a positive determination is made in step S1203, the process proceeds to step S1205. In step S1205, an update process is performed on the time-saving consecutive number counter provided in the various counter area 634 of the RAM 604. Specifically, the value of the time-saving consecutive number counter is incremented by "1".

Then, the process proceeds to step S1205, where it is determined whether the updated value of the time-saving consecutive number counter is equal to the first reference value stored in ROM 603. If a negative determination is made in step S1205, the process proceeds to step S1206. In step S1206, it is determined whether the value of the special consecutive number counter described above is equal to the second reference value stored in ROM 603. If a negative determination is made in step S1206, the process proceeds to step S1207.

In this embodiment, the first reference value is "10 times" and the second reference value is "40 times", with the second reference value being greater than the first reference value. The first reference value and the second reference value may be changed arbitrarily as long as this magnitude relationship is maintained. Even when making such changes, it is preferable that both the first reference value and the second reference value be "2 times" or more.

In step S1207, it is determined whether the hit that triggered the transition to the current open/close execution mode was either a 2R guaranteed jackpot or a 10R guaranteed jackpot B. If a positive determination is made in step S1207, the process proceeds to step S1208, where a transition process to a third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode is executed. Specifically, the high probability mode flag and the low frequency support mode flag are set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. As a result, in the subsequent normal game state, the lottery mode for the win/lose lottery becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode by the electric role 71 becomes the low frequency support mode. Thereafter, in step S1209, the various flags for the progression to the open/close execution mode (e.g., the winning mode flag and the jackpot flag, etc.) are erased, and the transition process ends.

On the other hand, if the hit that triggered the transition to the current open/close execution mode was a 10R guaranteed jackpot A, a negative judgment is made in step S1207 and the process proceeds to step S1210. In step S1210, a transition process to a second normal game state that corresponds to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode is executed. Specifically, a high probability mode flag and a high frequency support mode flag are set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. As a result, in the subsequent normal game state, the lottery mode for the win/lose lottery becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode by the electric role 71 becomes the high frequency support mode. Thereafter, in step S1209, various flags for the progression to the open/close execution mode (e.g., the winning mode flag and the jackpot flag, etc.) are erased, and the transition process ends.

In this embodiment, the time-saving consecutive count counter and the special consecutive count counter described above may be used to forcibly switch the game state. In other words, even if a 10R special jackpot A occurs, which corresponds to a transition to a high-frequency support mode, the game state may transition to a normal game state corresponding to a low-frequency support mode (e.g., the third normal game state), and even if a 2R special jackpot, a 10R special jackpot A, or a 10R special jackpot B occurs, which correspond to a transition to a high-probability mode, the game state may transition to a normal game state corresponding to a low-probability mode (e.g., the first normal game state). The control for realizing such behavior will be described below.

Returning to the explanation of step S1205, if a positive judgment is made in step S1205, i.e., if the value of the time-saving consecutive count counter is equal to the first reference value, the process proceeds to step S1210. In step S1210, the time-saving consecutive count counter is reset. Specifically, the value of the time-saving consecutive count counter is cleared to 0. Thereafter, in step S1208, a transition process to the third normal game state is executed, and in step S1209, various flags for progressing through the open/close execution mode (e.g., the prize mode flag, the jackpot flag, etc.) are erased, and this transition process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S1206, if a positive judgment is made in step S1206, that is, if the value of the continuous number counter for the special chance is the second reference value, the process proceeds to step S1212. In step S1212, the continuous number counter for the special chance is reset. Specifically, the value of the continuous number counter for the special chance is cleared to 0. After that, in step S1213, a transition process to the first normal game state is executed. Specifically, a low probability mode flag and a low frequency support mode flag are set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. As a result, in the subsequent normal game state, the lottery mode for the win/lose lottery becomes the low probability mode, and the support mode by the electric role 71 becomes the low frequency support mode. After that, in step S1209, various flags for the progression to the open/close execution mode (for example, the winning mode flag and the big win flag, etc.) are erased, and this transition process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S1201, if the trigger for transition to the current opening and closing execution mode is a special win, a negative judgment is made in step S1201 and the process proceeds to step S1214. In step S1214, a process for returning to the game state before transition to the opening and closing execution mode is executed. In other words, if the current special win occurs during the first normal game state, a process for returning to the first normal game state is executed, if the current special win occurs during the second normal game state, a process for returning to the second normal game state is executed, and if the current special win occurs during the third normal game state, a process for returning to the third normal game state is executed. Thereafter, in step S1209, various flags for progression to the opening and closing execution mode (e.g., a winning mode flag, a big win flag, etc.) are erased, and this transition process is terminated.

Next, the electric support processing executed in step S205 of the normal processing (see FIG. 16) will be described with reference to FIG. 27 to FIG. 29. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the electric support processing, FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram comparing the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, and FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the electric opening and closing processing.

(Electricity support processing)
In the electric support process, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a support in progress flag is stored in a support in progress flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The support in progress flag is a flag that is stored when the electric role 71 attached to the right operating port 62aR is switched to the open state and is erased when the electric role 71 is returned to the closed state.

If the support in progress flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1302, where it is determined whether or not a support win flag is stored in the support win flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The support win flag is stored when the opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric role 71 is opened is won, and is erased when the support in progress flag is stored.

If the support win flag is not stored, proceed to step S1303 and determine whether the value of timer counter TC2 provided in various counter area 634 of RAM 604 is "0". If the value of timer counter TC2 is not "0", the main power role support process is terminated.

If the value of timer counter TC2 is "0", proceed to step S1304 and determine whether it is time to end the variable display of the patterns in the through gate display unit DS. If it is time to end the variable display, in step S1305, a miss display is set and timer counter TC2 is set to "250" (equivalent to 0.5 sec), and then the process for supporting this electric role is terminated. By setting the miss display, the variable display of the patterns in the through gate display unit DS is terminated with the miss display stopped, and this miss display will continue for 0.5 sec (see Figure 29).

If the value of timer counter TC2 is "0" and it is not the time to end the variable display, proceed to step S1306 and determine whether the value of the number of reserved reel memories SN is greater than "0". If the value of the number of reserved reel memories SN is "0", the main electric reel support process ends as is. If the value of the number of reserved reel memories SN is greater than "0", in step S1307, determine whether the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode.

If the high frequency support mode is in progress, a positive judgment is made in step S1307, and the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, whether or not support is provided by the electric role 71 is determined by lottery (support lottery or opening lottery). Specifically, the value stored in the electric role reserve area Rc of the electric role memory area 633 is shifted, and the opening lottery is performed by referring to the value of the opening random number counter C4 shifted to the third execution area AE3 and the lottery table for the high frequency support mode stored in the hit/miss table memory area 621 of the ROM 603. In addition, at the same time as the opening lottery, the timer counter TC2 is set to "500" (corresponding to 1 sec). Note that the timer counter TC2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. After that, the variable display of the image in the through gate display unit DS continues until the value of the timer counter TC2 becomes "0", that is, for 1 sec (see FIG. 28).

In the following step S1309, it is determined whether or not the result of the opening lottery in step S1308 is a winning result (support win). If it is not a support win, the main electric role support processing ends. If it is a support win, in step S1310, a support win flag is set in the various flags storage area 635 of RAM 604, and the main electric role support processing ends.

If the game is in the low-frequency support mode, a negative judgment is made in step S1307, and the program proceeds to step S1311. In step S1311, whether or not support is provided by the electric role 71 is determined by lottery (support lottery or opening lottery). Specifically, the value stored in the electric role reserve area Rc of the electric role memory area 633 is shifted, and the opening lottery is performed by referring to the value of the opening random number counter C4 shifted to the third execution area AE3 and the lottery table for the low-frequency support mode stored in the hit/miss table memory area 621 of the ROM 603. In addition, at the same time as the opening lottery, the timer counter TC2 is set to "1000" to "2500" (i.e., 2 to 5 seconds). After that, the variable display of the image on the through gate display unit DS continues until the value of the timer counter TC2 becomes "0", that is, for 2 to 5 seconds (see FIG. 28).

In the following step S1312, it is determined whether or not the result of the opening lottery in step S1311 is a winning result (support win). If it is not a support win, the main electric role support processing ends. If it is a support win, in step S1313, a support win flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604, and the main electric role support processing ends.

The probability of winning support in high-frequency support mode (specifically 249/250) is higher than the probability of winning support in low-frequency support mode (specifically 125/250), so high-frequency support mode is favored.

Returning to the explanation of step S1302 in FIG. 27, if the support winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, a positive judgment is made in step S1302, and the process proceeds to step S1314 to judge whether the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the image is being displayed in the through gate display unit DS, so the main electric role support process is terminated. If the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0", a win display is set in step S1315. This ends the display of the image variation in the through gate display unit DS with the win display stopped. In the following step S1316, a support in progress flag is set in the various flag storage area 635, and the support winning flag stored in the various flag storage area 635 is erased, and then the main electric role support process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S1301, if a positive judgment is made in step S1301, i.e., if a support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, the process proceeds to step S1317, where an electric role opening/closing process for controlling the opening and closing of the electric role 71 is executed, and then the electric role support process is terminated. The electric role opening/closing process will be explained below with reference to FIG. 29.

(Electrical switching processing)
In the electric role opening and closing process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether the electric role 71 is open. Whether the electric role 71 is open is determined by whether the drive unit 332 is in a driving state. If the electric role 71 is open, the process proceeds to step S1402, and it is determined whether the number of winnings after the electric role 71 is opened for the right operating port 62aR attached thereto has reached the upper limit (in this embodiment, "10"). If a negative determination is made in step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1403, and it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0".

If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the main electric role opening and closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0", or if it is determined in step S1402 that the number of winnings has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S1404. In step S1404, a closing process is performed to switch (return) the electric role 71 to the closed state. After that, in step S1405, the support in progress flag stored in the various flag storage area 635 is erased, and the main electric role opening and closing process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S1401, if the electric role 71 is not open, a negative judgment is made in step S1401 and the process proceeds to step S1406. In step S1406, it is judged whether the timer counter TC2 is "0". If the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the electric role opening and closing process is terminated. If the timer counter TC2 is "0", an opening process is executed in step S1407 to switch the electric role 71 to the open state.

Then, in step S1408, it is determined whether or not the system is in high-frequency support mode. If the system is in high-frequency support mode, in step S1409, timer counter TC2 is set to "750" (equivalent to 1.5 sec), and the main electric switch opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if the system is in low-frequency support mode, in step S1410, timer counter TC2 is set to "250" (equivalent to 0.5 sec), and the main electric switch opening/closing process is terminated.

(Relationship between game state and variable display time)
As already explained, in this embodiment, the reserved information is acquired based on the ball entering the first actuation port 62a and the second actuation port 63a, and the variable display and fixed display of the picture or pattern in the game round are executed based on the acquired reserved information. Here, the variable display time of the picture or pattern is set according to the game state and the lottery result. Below, with reference to Figs. 30 to 33, a supplementary explanation will be given on the configuration related to the setting of the variable display time, etc. (variable display time setting process in the variable start process for the first actuation port and the variable display time setting process in the variable start process for the second actuation port). Fig. 30(a) is a flowchart showing the variable display time setting process in the variable start process for the first actuation port (variable display time setting process for the first actuation port), Fig. 30(b) is a flowchart showing the variable display time setting process in the variable start process for the first actuation port (variable display time setting process for the second actuation port), and Figs. 31 to 33 are schematic diagrams showing the relationship between the game state and the variable display time.

(Variable display time setting process for first operating port)
As shown in Fig. 30(a), in the variable display time setting process for the first operating port, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode is in effect. If the determination in step S1501 is affirmative, the setting process for the first normal gaming state is executed in step S1502, and then the variable display time setting process is terminated.

In the setting process for the first normal game state, a table corresponding to the current game round is selected from the various variable display time tables for the first normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603, and the variable display time is set according to the number of reserved information stored in the first operation port reserved area Ra in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604, the result of the win/lose lottery, whether or not a reach has occurred, etc.

The variable display time is configured so that when comparing a jackpot result with a miss result, the former is more likely to be longer than the latter, and in the case of a miss result where no reach display occurs (a complete miss), the variable display time is configured to be shorter as the number of reserved information stored increases. FIG. 31 (a1) illustrates an example of the variable display time when a complete miss occurs in the first normal game state. For example, when the number of reserved information stored is "0" or "1", the variable display time is set to one of "12, 13, or 14 seconds", when the number of reserved information stored is "2", the variable display time is set to one of "7, 8, or 9 seconds", and when the number of reserved information stored is "3" or "4", the variable display time is set to one of "3, 4, or 5 seconds".

As shown in FIG. 33 (a1), the variable display time when a special win occurs in the first normal gaming state is basically the same as when a miss occurs. However, in this embodiment, if a special win occurs during the first normal gaming state, the game round presentation ends without going through the reach display.

As shown in FIG. 32 (a1), the variable display time in the case of a jackpot in the first normal game state is set to anywhere from "20 to 40 seconds" regardless of the number of reserved information items stored. This variable display time is within the same range as the variable display time set in the game round corresponding to a missed reach (see FIG. 31 (a1)). In the case of a jackpot, a relatively long time within that range is likely to be set, and in the case of a missed reach, a relatively short time within that range is likely to be set. In other words, a difference is provided so that a reach display with a long variable display time has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a reach display with a short variable display time.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 30(a), if a negative judgment is made in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1503. In step S1503, it is judged whether or not the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode is in effect. If a positive judgment is made in step S1503, setting processing for the second normal gaming state is executed in step S1504, and then the variable display time setting processing is terminated.

In the setting process for the second normal game state, the variable display time is set by selecting a table corresponding to the current game round from among the various variable display time tables for the second normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603.

In the second normal game state, unlike the first normal game state, the selection options for the variable display time are limited to one, regardless of the number of reserved information items stored. Specifically, in the case of a miss in the second normal game state, the variable display time is set to "1200 sec" (see FIG. 31 (a2)), and the variable display time is longer than in the first normal game state.

In addition, when a jackpot or special win occurs in the second normal game state, the variable display time is set to "600 sec" (see Fig. 32 (a2) and Fig. 33 (a2)). In other words, the variable display time is configured to be shorter when a jackpot or special win occurs than when a miss occurs.

Details will be described later, but in the second normal game state, by firing the game ball into the right route formed in the game area PE, the game progresses to the player's advantage compared to when aiming for the left route. Many of the game balls fired into the right route enter the second actuation port 63a. In the second normal game state, the variable display time of the game round related to the first actuation port 62a becomes extremely long, so that many game rounds related to the second actuation port 63a can be executed while one game round related to the first actuation port 62a is being executed, and the game progresses mainly based on the reserved information related to the second actuation port 63a.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1503 in FIG. 30(a), the process proceeds to step S1505. In step S1505, it is judged whether or not the third normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode is in effect. If a positive judgment is made in step S1505, setting processing for the third normal gaming state is executed in step S1506, and then the variable display time setting processing is terminated.

In the setting process for the third normal game state, the variable display time is set by selecting a table corresponding to the current game round from among the various variable display time tables for the third normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603.

In the third normal game state, when a miss or special win occurs in the second normal game state, the selection of the variable display time is limited to one, regardless of the number of reserved information stored. Specifically, for the game times when a miss or special win occurs in the third normal game state, the variable display time is set to "0.1 sec" (see FIG. 31 (a3) and FIG. 33 (a3)). The variable display time = "0.1 sec" does not correspond to the reach display, and when a special win occurs in the third normal game state, it is clearly indicated that it is a special win without going through the reach display. In contrast, when a jackpot occurs in the third normal game state, the variable display time is set to "5 sec" (see FIG. 32 (a3)). In addition, the variable display time = "5 sec" does not correspond to the reach display, and when a jackpot occurs in the third normal game state, it is clearly indicated that it is a jackpot without going through the reach display.

Incidentally, in the game turn that triggers the transition from the third normal game state to the second normal game state (i.e., the game turn that results in a 10R special jackpot A), the variable display time can be set to a variable display time (e.g., "300 sec") that is longer than the variable display time when a 10R special jackpot A occurs in the first or second normal game state, thereby slowing down (delaying) the transition from the third normal game state to the second normal game state.

In the first normal game state and the third normal game state, the determined display time of the pattern on the first actuation port display unit D1 and the determined display time of the pattern on the pattern display device 75 are set to "1 sec", and in the second normal game state, the determined display time of the pattern on the first actuation port display unit D1 and the determined display time of the pattern on the pattern display device 75 are set to "0.5 sec".

(Variable display time setting process for second operating port)
As shown in Fig. 30(b), in the variable display time setting process for the second operating port, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode is in effect. If the determination in step S1601 is affirmative, the setting process for the first normal gaming state is executed in step S1602, and then the variable display time setting process is terminated.

In the setting process for the first normal game state, a table corresponding to the current game round is selected from the various variable display time tables for the first normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603, and the variable display time is set. Note that the variable display time table referenced in the variable display time setting process for the second operating port is a different table from the variable display time table referenced in the variable display time setting process for the first operating port.

In the first normal gaming state, the selection of the variable display time is limited to one, regardless of various conditions such as the number of reserved balls stored in the reserved area Rb for the second operating port in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604, whether a reach has occurred, etc. Specifically, if a miss occurs in the first normal gaming state, the variable display time is set to "1200 sec" (see FIG. 31 (b1)). In contrast, if a jackpot occurs in the first normal gaming state, the variable display time is set to "600 sec" (see FIG. 32 (b1)).

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 30(b), if a negative judgment is made in step S1601, the process proceeds to step S1603. In step S1603, it is judged whether or not the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode is in effect. If a positive judgment is made in step S1603, setting processing for the second normal gaming state is executed in step S1604, and then the variable display time setting processing is terminated.

In the setting process for the second normal game state, a table corresponding to the current game round is selected from the various variable display time tables for the second normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603, and the variable display time is set. Note that the variable display time table referenced in the variable display time setting process for the second operating port is a different table from the variable display time table referenced in the variable display time setting process for the first operating port.

In the setting process for the second normal game state, if a miss occurs in the second normal game state, the variable display time is set to "1 sec" (see FIG. 31 (b2)). In contrast, if a jackpot occurs in the first normal game state, the variable display time is set to "5 sec" (see FIG. 32 (b2)). A variable display time of "5 sec" does not correspond to a reach display, and if a jackpot occurs in the second normal game state, it is clearly displayed as a jackpot without going through the reach display.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 30(b), if a positive judgment is made in step S1603, the process proceeds to step S1605. In step S1605, a setting process for the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode (setting process for the third normal game state) is executed, and then the variable display time setting process is terminated.

In the setting process for the third normal game state, a table corresponding to the current game round is selected from the various variable display time tables for the first normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603, and the variable display time is set. Note that the variable display time table referenced in the variable display time setting process for the second operating port is a different table from the variable display time table referenced in the variable display time setting process for the first operating port.

In the setting process for the third normal game state, if a miss occurs in the third normal game state, the variable display time is set to "1200 sec" (see FIG. 31 (b3)). In contrast, if a jackpot occurs in the first normal game state, the variable display time is set to "600 sec" (see FIG. 32 (b3)).

In the first normal game state and the third normal game state, the fixed display time of the pattern on the second actuation port display section D2 and the fixed display time of the pattern on the pattern display device 75 are set to "1 sec", and in the second normal game state, the fixed display time of the pattern on the second actuation port display section D2 and the fixed display time of the pattern on the pattern display device 75 are set to "0.5 sec".

In this embodiment, although the game round related to the first actuation port 62a and the game round related to the second actuation port 63a are executed simultaneously in parallel, as described above, a large difference is provided between the variable display time of the game round related to the first actuation port 62a and the variable display time of the game round related to the second actuation port 63a for each normal game state, so that the main target for progressing the game is switched. Specifically, in the first normal game state, the game progresses with the game round related to the first actuation port 62a as the main target, in the second normal game state, the game progresses with the game round related to the second actuation port 63a as the main target, and in the third normal game state, the game progresses with the game round related to the first actuation port 62a as the main target.

In addition, in a game round related to the first actuation port 62a, there is a 1/2 probability of a special win. Although the game ball launched to the right route is configured to enter the second actuation port 63a, in the third normal game state, when a picture is displayed as stopped on the first actuation port display section D1 while a game round related to the second actuation port 63a is in progress, the game round related to the second actuation port 63a is forced to end as a miss. This ideally realizes a configuration in which the game progresses with the game round related to the first actuation port 62a taking center stage in the third normal game state.

(Game Flow)
Next, the basic flow of the game will be described with reference to Figure 12 and Figures 34 to 36. Figure 34 is a block diagram (game flow) showing the flow of the game, Figure 35 is a schematic diagram comparing game states, and Figure 36 is a schematic diagram showing the change in the number of balls held as the game progresses. The following explanation will focus on Figure 34, and will refer to Figures 12, 35, and 36 as appropriate.

(First normal gaming state)
In the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, a lottery for a big win and a special win is executed by the occurrence of a winning entry into the first actuation port 62a (more specifically, the lower actuation port 62aL) arranged in the game area PE (left route). In this embodiment, the first normal game state is a game state in which a difference is provided so that the player's advantage is the lowest among the first to third normal game states.

In the first normal game state, the symbols displayed in the center of the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 correspond to the game round related to the first actuation port 62a (in other words, the symbols displayed in the center of the display screen 75a do not correspond to the game round related to the second actuation port 63a). In the first normal game state, the symbols are used to execute a game round presentation (such as a reach display) corresponding to the game round related to the first actuation port 62a.

If the game ball is shot toward the right route during the first normal game state, more specifically, if a winning entry occurs in the through gate 66, a warning sound is output from the speaker unit 29 and the message "Please return to left shot" is displayed in the center of the display screen 75a as a prompt to shoot the game ball toward the left route.

If any type of jackpot is obtained during the first normal game state, the game will transition to the first special game state (open/close execution mode). As already explained, in the first normal game state, there are two types of jackpots based on winning the first operating port 62a: a 2R special jackpot and a 10R special jackpot A, and the breakdown of these in the first normal game state is 66.5% for the 2R special jackpot and 33.5% for the 10R special jackpot A (see FIG. 12).

If a 10R special jackpot A occurs during the first normal game state, the game state transitions to a second normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode after the first special game state ends. The second normal game state is a game state set to give the player the highest advantage among the first to third normal game states. In contrast, if a 2R special jackpot occurs during the first normal game state, the game state transitions to a third normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode after the first special game state ends. Although the player's advantage is in the order of first normal game state < third normal game state < second normal game state, the difference in advantage between the third normal game state and the first normal game state is smaller than the difference in advantage between the third normal game state and the second normal game state and the difference in advantage between the first normal game state and the second normal game state, and the difference is kept to an extremely small extent.

(Second normal gaming state)
In the second normal game state, the variable display time of the pattern (special pattern 1) in the first actuation port display section D1 becomes long (1200 sec or 600 sec), and the variable display time of the pattern (special pattern 2) in the second actuation port display section D2 becomes short (1 sec or 5 sec). In other words, by shifting from the first normal game state to the second normal game state, the relationship between the length of the variable display time is reversed between the first actuation port display section D1 and the second actuation port display section D2 (see FIG. 35). During the second normal game state, the game ball will enter both the first actuation port 62a and the second actuation port 63a by firing the game ball to the right route, but the game will proceed with the game being mainly played on the second actuation port 63a due to the longer variable display time in the first actuation port display section D1.

In the second normal game state, the pattern displayed in the center of the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 corresponds to the game round related to the second actuation port 63a. In other words, in the second normal game state, a game round presentation corresponding to the game round related to the second actuation port 63a is executed in the center of the display screen 75a. In other words, the pattern displayed in the center of the display screen 75a is not associated with the game round related to the first actuation port 62a.

If a jackpot occurs in the second normal game state, the game transitions to the first special game state (open/close execution mode). As already explained, in the second normal game state, only the 10R special jackpot A is provided as a jackpot based on winning the second actuation port 63a (see FIG. 12). In other words, after the transition to the second normal game state, a loop of 10R special jackpot A → first special game state → second normal game state will occur.

As already explained, the pachinko machine shown in this embodiment is equipped with two types of limiters (a limiter for special probability and a limiter for time-saving) using two consecutive number counters. In the second normal game state, the consecutive number counters are updated when the above loop is repeated. Specifically, a 10R special probability jackpot A is a jackpot that corresponds to a transition to a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, and when the 10R special probability jackpot A is reached, the value of the time-saving consecutive number counter and the value of the consecutive number counter for special probability are each increased by "1".

When the value of the time-saving consecutive number counter reaches the first reference value (corresponding to consecutive number = 10 times), the time-saving limiter is activated. As a result, the game transitions through the first special game state to the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode, and the loop ends. At this time, the value of the time-saving consecutive number counter is cleared to 0. When the game transitions from the first normal game state to the second normal game state, when the value of the time-saving consecutive number counter reaches the first reference value, the value of the special chance consecutive number counter does not reach the second reference value (corresponding to consecutive number = 40 times). The value of the special chance consecutive number counter is then carried over from the second normal game state to the third normal game state without being cleared to 0.

When the game transitions from the first normal game state to the second normal game state, the player will receive 10 consecutive 10R special jackpots, including the 10R special jackpot A that triggered the transition, and can expect to win approximately 12,000 prize balls. In other words, the player's balls will increase significantly as a result of the transition to the second normal game state (see Figure 36).

(Third normal gaming state)
The transition route to the third normal game state is roughly divided into two routes: a 2R certainty bonus jackpot during the first normal game state, and the operation of a time-saving limiter during the second normal game state.

In the third normal game state, the variable display time of the image (special image 1) on the first actuation port display section D1 is short (0.1 sec or 5 sec), and the variable display time of the image (special image 2) on the second actuation port display section D2 is short (1200 sec or 600 sec). In other words, when the second normal game state is switched to the third normal game state, the relationship between the long and short variable display times is reversed (see FIG. 35). In other words, in the third normal game state, when the game ball is launched toward the right route as in the second normal game state, the game progresses with the first actuation port 62a as the main play. Incidentally, when the first normal game state is switched to the third normal game state, the relationship between the long and short variable display times is maintained.

The transition to the third normal game state causes the support mode of the electric device 71 to switch from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. This means that the probability of winning through the first operating port 62a when the game ball is fired to the right route is lower than in the high-frequency support mode. However, most of the game times related to the first operating port 62a result in a special win, and the second variable winning device 65 is opened.

During the high-frequency support mode, most of the game balls are guided by the electric device 71 to the first operating port 62a, and the flow of game balls toward the second variable winning device 65 located downstream of the first operating port 62a (right operating port 62aR) is suppressed. In contrast, during the low-frequency support mode, a certain number of game balls pass through the electric device 71 and flow toward the second variable winning device 65, and it is set so that approximately one game ball wins the second variable winning device 65 with each opening. This reduces the loss of balls held by the player.

In addition, if a 2R special jackpot occurs in the third normal game state, the game moves to the first special game state (open/close execution mode). The 2R special jackpot is a jackpot that corresponds to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, and after the game moves to the third normal game state, the game loops from the 2R special jackpot to the first special game state to the third normal game state, with the second special game state triggered by the special jackpot being inserted. Here, in the third normal game state, the breakdown of jackpots that occur due to winning the first operating port 62a is 99.8% for the 2R special jackpot and 0.2% for the 10R special jackpot A. In other words, most jackpots are 2R special jackpots. And, with the intervention of the second special game state, the player can continue playing while suppressing the loss of balls by firing the game ball to the right route. In addition, in the second normal game state, the probability of a jackpot is 10 times higher than in the first normal game state, and a certain number of prize balls can be obtained by a 2R jackpot. In general, in the third normal game state, by continuing to shoot game balls toward the right route, it is possible to proceed with the game while keeping the loss of balls to almost zero (see Figure 36).

In addition, in the third normal game state, the pattern displayed in the center of the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 corresponds to the game round related to the first actuation port 62a. In other words, in the third normal game state, a game round presentation corresponding to the game round related to the first actuation port 62a is executed in the center of the display screen 75a. In other words, the pattern displayed in the center of the display screen 75a is not associated with the game round related to the second actuation port 63a.

In the third normal game state, since all jackpots correspond to the high probability mode, the time-saving consecutive count counter described above is not updated and remains at 0. In contrast, the special probability consecutive count counter is incremented by "1" each time a special probability jackpot occurs through the above loop. If the value of the special probability consecutive count counter has not reached the second reference value (equivalent to consecutive counts of 40), the above loop continues, and when the value of the special probability consecutive count counter reaches the second reference value (equivalent to consecutive counts of 40), the game transitions to the first normal game state after the first special game state ends.

Although the probability is extremely low, if a 10R special jackpot A occurs before the special limiter is activated by the special consecutive times counter, the game will transition to the second normal game state. In this case, the value of the special consecutive times counter is carried over from the third normal game state to the second normal game state. Therefore, when transitioning from the third normal game state to the second normal game state, the subsequent behavior will change significantly depending on whether the difference between the value of the special consecutive times counter and the second reference value exceeds the first reference value.

Specifically, if the difference between the value of the consecutive times counter for the special probability change and the second reference value exceeds the first reference value, the 10R special probability change jackpot A will occur a total of 10 times, including the 10R special probability change jackpot A that triggered the transition to the second normal game state, providing another chance to greatly increase the number of balls held. In contrast, if the difference between the value of the consecutive times counter for the special probability change and the second reference value is below the first reference value, the special probability change limiter will be activated before the time-saving limiter is activated, and the number of balls held will be increased to a certain extent before returning to the first normal game state. In other words, when returning to the second normal game state from the third normal game state, the duration of the third normal game state may be shorter than the initial transition to the third normal game state.

In addition, if the value of the time-saving consecutive number counter reaches the first reference value and the value of the special consecutive number counter reaches the second reference value, the game will transition from the second normal game state to the first normal game state.

Next, we will provide additional information on the relationship between the transition trigger to the third normal game state and the duration of the third normal game state. If the time-saving limiter is activated after the first normal game state has been transitioned to the second normal game state, and the game state transitions to the third normal game state, the continuous play counter for the special probability has already counted up by the first reference value related to the continuous play counter for the time-saving consecutive play. In other words, the "remaining number of times" until the continuous play limiter for the special probability is activated = "second reference value" - "first reference". In contrast, if a 2R special probability jackpot occurs during the first normal game state, the value of the continuous play counter for the special probability is incremented by the amount of the 2R special probability jackpot when the third normal game state begins, and the "remaining number of times" until the continuous play limiter for the special probability is activated = "second reference value" - 1.

As already explained, the first reference value is greater than 1. For this reason, if a transition to the third normal gaming state occurs as a result of a 2R special jackpot during the first normal gaming state, the duration of stay in the third normal gaming state, i.e., the expectation of promotion to the second normal gaming state, will be higher than if a transition to the third normal gaming state occurs due to the activation of the time-saving limiter.

Here, in the third normal game state, the loss of balls is suppressed compared to the first normal game state, so the player can play while keeping investments down. And, although the third normal game state is generally more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state, the distribution of jackpots that transition to the second normal game state is extremely small in the third normal game state. Specifically, in the first normal game state, the jackpot probability is 1/300 and the distribution of 10R special jackpot A is 335/1000, while in the third normal game state, the jackpot probability is 1/30 and the distribution of 10R special jackpot A is 2/1000. In other words, the probability of getting a 10R special jackpot A in one lottery is 0.112% in the first normal game state and 0.007% in the third normal game state. The player can choose whether to play in the third normal gaming state with an emphasis on reducing investment, or to not play in the third normal gaming state with an emphasis on time efficiency.

Now, with reference to Figure 36, we will explain the residence time in the upper loop section consisting of the second normal game state and the special game state, and the residence time in the lower loop section consisting of the third normal game state and the special game state.

The average time required to transition from the first normal game state to the third normal game state via the second normal game state is set to be "30 minutes" when game balls are continuously (without interruption) shot toward the right route. In contrast, the average time required from the activation of the limiter by the time-saving counter to transition to the third normal game state to the activation of the limiter by the consecutive number of times for the special probability change counter to transition to the first normal game state, that is, the average time required to transition from the second game state to the first game state via the third game state, is also set to be "30 minutes". In other words, the average stay time in the upper loop section (second normal game state to special game state) where the number of balls held can be greatly increased is the same as the average stay time in the lower loop section (third game state to special game state) where the increase and decrease of the number of balls held is suppressed. In this way, the average stay time in the lower loop section is set longer so that it is not shorter than the average stay time in the higher loop section, and by interposing the lower loop section between the higher loop section and the higher loop section, it is possible to ensure a certain amount of interval between when a large number of balls are dispensed in the higher loop section and when the system transitions to the higher loop section again and a large number of balls are dispensed.

In this way, in order to make the third game state function as a suppression means for suppressing excessive ball release, it is undesirable for the existence of the third game state to give the impression that the game is simply dragging on. In this regard, in this embodiment, 2R special jackpots and special jackpots occur frequently during the third game state, preventing the game from becoming monotonous and eliminating the above concerns.

When the player transitions from the first normal game state to the third normal game state without passing through the second normal game state, the player's time in the third normal game state is approximately 40 minutes. During this time, the player can play with very little investment. In this way, by favoring the time spent in the third normal game state, which functions as a chance zone, over the time spent in the second normal game state, the player's motivation to play can be prevented from rapidly decreasing if the player does not achieve the 10R special jackpot A.

In the third normal game state, the probability of transitioning to the second normal game state is lower than the probability of transitioning from the first normal game state to the second normal game state, but the loss of balls is kept extremely small, making it more favorable than the first normal game state. After a large number of prize balls have been paid out in the second normal game state, the state is temporarily transitioned to the third normal game state, preventing excessive changes in the number of balls in a short period of time. This is preferable in terms of improving the soundness of the game.

In the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the lottery based on the winning of the first actuation port 62a and the lottery based on the winning of the second actuation port 63a are each favored. In this second normal game state, the game proceeds with the game number related to the second actuation port 63a being the main one, and when the lottery based on the winning of the second actuation port 63a results in a 10R special jackpot A, the value of the time-saving consecutive number counter (the number of consecutive jackpots that trigger a transition to the high frequency support mode) and the value of the special jackpot consecutive number counter (the number of consecutive jackpots that trigger a transition to the high probability mode) are each updated. Here, when the number of consecutive times stored by the time-saving consecutive times counter (the number of consecutive jackpots that trigger a transition to the high-frequency support mode) reaches a first reference value (specifically, 10 times), the game state transitions to a third game state that is a game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, and when the number of consecutive times stored by the probability variation consecutive times counter (the number of consecutive jackpots that trigger a transition to the high-probability mode) reaches a second reference value (specifically, 40 times), the game state transitions to the first game state that is a game state corresponding to the low-probability mode. In other words, the subsequent development of the game will change significantly depending on which of the two limiters (the time-saving limiter and the probability variation limiter) is activated. With this configuration, monotony in the game can be suppressed and it can contribute to increasing the attention to the game.

In particular, since the first reference value (10 times) is less than the second reference value (40 times), the time-saving limiter is generally more likely to operate before the probability-change limiter. In other words, the transition from the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode is more likely to be to the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode. Both the second normal game state and the third normal game state correspond to the high probability mode, and even after transition (demotion) to the third game state, the chances of winning a jackpot are maintained to be the same as in the second normal game state. This is preferable in terms of preventing monotony in the third game state, which is the transition from the second game state.

When the time-saving limiter is activated to transition from the second normal game state to the third normal game state, the value of the continuous number of times counter for the special probability change is carried over from the second normal game state to the third normal game state. In the third normal game state, the game proceeds with the game times related to the first operating port 62a as the main focus, and most of the jackpots that are obtained in the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 62a are 2R special probability change jackpots. A 2R special probability change jackpot is a jackpot that triggers a transition to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode, and when the 2R special probability change jackpot is obtained, the value of the continuous number of times counter for the special probability change is updated. Then, the special game state and the third normal game state are looped until the value of the continuous number of times counter for the special probability change reaches the second reference value (40 times). If the time-saving limiter and the continuous probability change limiter are configured to operate in stages in this way, the diversification of the game described above can be preferably realized.

The main transition route to the second normal game state is set to be a 10R special jackpot A during the first normal game state, but in the first normal game state, the time-saving limiter (value of the time-saving consecutive number counter) and the special jackpot limiter (value of the special jackpot consecutive number counter) are both reset (cleared to 0). In other words, when the first normal game state transitions to the second normal game state via the main transition route, the value of the time-saving consecutive number counter and the value of the special jackpot consecutive number counter become the same (both are "1"), and the time-saving limiter basically operates before the special jackpot limiter. This provides an interval until the second game state returns to the higher loop between the second game state and the special game state, making it easier to suppress the higher loop from producing a large number of balls in succession in a short period of time.

In the third normal game state, the game progresses with the first operation port 62a playing as the main game, as described above, but the lottery based on the winning of the first operation port 62a may result in a 10R special chance A, which is a transition trigger (return trigger) to the second normal game state, although the probability is extremely low. The value of the special chance consecutive times counter is carried over from the third normal game state to the second normal game state, while the value of the time-saving consecutive times counter becomes "0" when returning from the third normal game state. Therefore, when returning from the third normal game state to the second normal game state, the special chance limiter may be activated before the time-saving limiter is activated. In other words, the configuration is such that a 2R special chance jackpot occurs in the third normal game state, and the amount of the special chance consecutive times counter that has been added determines which limiter is activated first. This effectively suppresses monotony of the game.

In the configuration shown in this embodiment, when the game transitions to the second normal game state, 10R special jackpot A will be consecutive in most cases, resulting in a large number of balls being dispensed. Then, when the number of consecutive 10R special jackpot A hits reaches the upper limit and the time-saving limiter is activated, the game transitions to the third normal game state, and in the third normal game state, the game is played with the aim of returning to the second normal game state. Here, although the third normal game state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state, transitioning to the most advantageous second normal game state is more difficult than the first normal game state. Specifically, when compared in one game round, the probability of transitioning from the first normal game state to the second normal game state is approximately 1/896, while the probability of transitioning from the third normal game state to the second normal game state is approximately 1/15,000 (see Figures 10 to 12). Furthermore, in the third normal game state, the number of times (number of jackpots) that can be challenged for the 10R special jackpot A, which is the trigger for transition to the second normal game state, is also limited by the special jackpot limiter, and the transition condition to the first normal game state may be met before the 10R special jackpot A is reached. Even considering this point, the third normal game state is treated less favorably than the first normal game state in terms of the transition condition to the second normal game state. In this way, if the first normal game state is returned to via the third normal game state, in which transition to the second normal game state is difficult, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned upper loop from being excessively continuous. This is preferable, for example, in terms of creating a large number of balls while suppressing the excessive increase in gambling caused by it (for example, excessive balls being discharged in a short period of time).

Since both the second normal game state and the third normal game state correspond to the high probability mode, the probability of hitting a jackpot does not decrease even if the game state is downgraded from the second normal game state to the third normal game state. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the tempo at which a jackpot occurs as the game progresses from slowing down due to the transition from the second normal game state to the third normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting the impression that the game is being unnecessarily delayed in a configuration in which the game state is transitioned to the first normal game state via the third normal game state.

As described above, the third normal game state corresponds to a high probability mode, and is configured to be more likely to result in a jackpot than the first normal game state. After transitioning to the third normal game state, the special game state and the third game state are looped, thereby preventing the game from becoming monotonous. Also, in the third normal game state, by continuing to fire the game ball toward the right route, a special game state triggered by a 2R special jackpot is generated, as well as a special game state triggered by a special win. This provides more opportunities to win in the variable winning devices 64, 65 than in the first normal game state, and prevents the loss of balls. If the third normal game state is inserted during the process of returning from the second normal game state to the first normal game state, there is a concern that the presence of the third normal game state may give the player the impression that it is bothersome; however, by making 2R special jackpots and special jackpots occur more frequently during the third normal game state, the base (the ratio of the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls fired in a unit time) is raised above that of the first normal game state, the occurrence of the above inconvenience is suppressed.

If the first normal game state is immediately returned to immediately after transitioning from the second normal game state to the third normal game state, there is a high possibility of re-transitioning (re-promotion) to the second normal game state in a short span of time. The occurrence of such an event can lead to excessive ball output. Although excessive ball output can be suppressed by lowering the degree of advantage in the second normal game state, it is expected that the sharpness of the game will decrease as the difference in the degree of advantage between the first normal game state and the third normal game state becomes smaller. There is concern that this will be a major constraint on preventing the game from becoming monotonous and increasing attention to the game. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, the average time required to transition from the second normal game state to the first normal game state via the third normal game state under a situation in which the launch of game balls to the right route is performed continuously (continuously without interruption) is set to be equal to or longer than the average time required to transition from the first normal game state to the third normal game state via the second normal game state under similar circumstances, thereby increasing the interval until the return to the second normal game state, thereby preventing excessive balls from being dispensed in a short period of time. This is preferable in terms of relaxing the constraints on the advantage of the second normal game state and enhancing the sharpness of the game (creating a large number of balls being dispensed). For the above reasons, the above configuration makes it possible to favorably increase the level of attention to the game.

In the configuration shown in this embodiment, the number of consecutive high probability jackpots stored by the high probability jackpot counter is carried over from the second normal game state to the third normal game state, and the number of times remaining to reach the second reference value during the third normal game state may decrease depending on the number of high probability jackpots during the second normal game state. With this configuration, the transition condition to the second normal game state (10R high probability jackpot A) is more likely to be met before the second reference value is reached when transitioning to the third normal game state not via the second normal game state than when transitioning to the third normal game state via the second normal game state.

The number of consecutive wins of the special jackpot stored by the special jackpot counter is carried over from the third normal game state to the second normal game state. As a result, the number of loops between the second normal game state and the special game state can change depending on the number of times the special jackpot occurs in the third normal game state. By strengthening the relationship between the second normal game state and the third normal game state in this way, the attention-grabbing effect on the game due to the diversification of the game can be more effectively exerted. In addition, when the third normal game state → the second normal game state → the third normal game state is reached, the number of remaining times until the second reference value is reached is fewer in the second third normal game state than in the first third normal game state. In this way, it is preferable to suppress excessive loops between the third normal game state and the second normal game state in order to ensure the soundness of the gaming machine.

When the game state transitions to the third normal game state, the difficulty of achieving the transition condition to the second normal game state (10R special jackpot A) before the number of consecutive special jackpots reaches the second reference value, i.e., the difficulty of returning to or progressing to the second normal game state, differs depending on whether or not the game state has passed through the advantageous second normal game state. In particular, by favoring progression to the third normal game state without passing through the second normal game state to be easier than returning to the third normal game state after passing through the second normal game state, it is possible to diversify the game while suppressing excessive bias in the player's advantage.

<Modification 1>
In the first embodiment, the average time required for a transition from the second normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state via the third normal gaming state is made equal to the average time required for a transition from the first normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state via the second normal gaming state, but this is not limited to this. For example, a difference may be provided so that the average time required for a transition from the second normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state via the third normal gaming state is longer than the average time required for a transition from the first normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state via the second normal gaming state.

<Modification 2>
In the first embodiment, a return route from the third normal game state to the second normal game state is provided. Specifically, if a 10R special jackpot A occurs during the third normal game state, the game state can be returned to the second normal game state via the first special game state, although this is an extremely low probability. Here, in the game round that triggers the transition to the second normal game state in the third normal game state, a long variable time (for example, 5 minutes or more) is set as the variable display time, and even when the transition from the third normal game state to the second normal game state is taken into account, the average stay time in the upper loop section (second normal game state to special game state) and the average stay time in the lower loop section (third game state to special game state) in which the increase and decrease of the balls held is suppressed are configured to be the same or the latter is longer than the former, so that the interval between the large amount of balls is earned.

Second Embodiment
In the first embodiment, the number of balls held is suppressed (slightly decreased) in the section from the transition from the first or second normal game state to the third normal game state to the transition to the first or second normal game state. In this embodiment, the number of balls held is increased in the section, and the configuration related to the second normal game state is partially changed accordingly, which is different from the first embodiment. Below, referring to Figures 37 to 39, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. Figure 37 is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for each operating port, Figure 38 is a schematic diagram showing the first variable winning device, and Figure 39 is a block diagram (game flow) showing the flow of the game.

As shown in FIG. 37, the allocation table for each actuation port is stored for each type of normal game state. The allocation table for the first actuation port is the same as that of the first embodiment (see FIG. 12(a) and FIG. 37(a)). In contrast, the allocation table for the second actuation port differs from that of the first embodiment in that it has an allocation for normal jackpots.

As shown in FIG. 37(b), the second operating port allocation table is broadly divided into an allocation table for the first normal game state, an allocation table for the second normal game state, and an allocation table for the third normal game state.

For the allocation table for the first normal game state, of the winning type counter C2 values of "0" to "999", a total of 900 values from "0" to "899" (11th result) correspond to a 10R special jackpot B, and a total of 100 values from "900" to "999" (12th result) correspond to a 10R normal jackpot.

For the allocation table for the second normal game state, of the winning type counter C2 values of "0" to "999", a total of 900 values from "0" to "899" (11th result) correspond to a 10R special jackpot A, and a total of 100 values from "900" to "999" (12th result) correspond to a 10R normal jackpot.

For the allocation table for the third normal game state, of the winning type counter C2 values of "0" to "999", a total of 900 values from "0" to "899" (11th result) correspond to a 10R special jackpot B, and a total of 100 values from "900" to "999" (12th result) correspond to a 10R normal jackpot.

In this way, if a jackpot occurs in a game involving the second operating port 63a, the allocation of the jackpot to a special jackpot is set to 90% in any of the first to third normal game states.

The 10R normal jackpot is a jackpot where the lottery mode corresponds to the low probability mode and the support mode corresponds to the low frequency support, and when the 10R normal jackpot occurs, the game transitions via the first special game state to the first normal game state which corresponds to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

In this embodiment, the first variable winning device 64 is the target for opening in the special game state (first special game state) which is entered upon a 2R special jackpot, a 10R special jackpot A, a 10R special jackpot B, or a 10R normal jackpot. If a game ball flows into the favorable ball entry area (V area) of the first variable winning device 64 during the first special game state, a transition to a normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode after the first special game state ends is confirmed, and if a game ball does not flow into the favorable ball entry area (V area), a transition to a normal game state (first normal game state) corresponding to a low probability mode after the special game state ends is confirmed.

Now, with reference to Figure 38, we will explain the first variable winning device 64X in this embodiment.

(First variable winning device 64X)
Inside the first variable winning device 64X, a ball passage 332X is formed through which the game balls that flow into the first large winning port 331 pass. The ball passage 332X branches into a first branch passage 334X and a second branch passage 335X at an intermediate position. A flow path switching member 336X capable of switching the flow destination of the game ball to the first branch passage 334X and the second branch passage 335X is disposed at this branching portion. The drive unit (more specifically, a solenoid) for the flow path switching member 336X is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main control device 162. The flow path switching member 336X is configured to wait at a protruding position protruding into the ball passage 332X when no drive signal is output from the main control device 162 (non-excited state).

When the flow path switching member 336X is in the protruding position, the inlet of the first branch passage 334X is blocked by the flow path switching member 336X. In this state, game balls that reach the branch portion are prevented from flowing into the first branch passage 334X, and instead flow into the second branch passage 335X.

When the main control device 162 outputs a drive unit drive signal for the flow path switching member 336X and the drive unit is excited, the flow path switching member 336X moves to a retracted position where it does not protrude into the ball passage 332X, and the entrance portion of the first branch passage 334X is opened. This changes the destination of the game balls. In this state, game balls that reach the branch portion are prevented from flowing into the second branch passage 335X, and these game balls flow into the first branch passage 334X.

Here, the movement of the flow path switching member 336X is predefined depending on the type of jackpot result. Specifically, in the case of a 10R normal jackpot, the flow path switching member 336X moves to the retracted position as the shutter 333 moves from the closed position to the open position, and the flow path switching member 336X returns to the protruding position immediately thereafter. Specifically, the time required for the flow path switching member 336X to return to the protruding position is shorter than the time required for a game ball that has flowed into the first large winning opening 331 to reach the branching portion. Therefore, in the case of a 10R normal jackpot, flow into the first branch passage 334X is essentially avoided.

In contrast, in the case of a 2R or 10R guaranteed jackpot, the flow path switching member 336X moves to the retracted position as the shutter 333 moves from the closed position to the open position, but it is then set to wait in the protruding position until the shutter 333 returns to the closed position. Therefore, in the case of a 2R or 10R guaranteed jackpot, most of the game balls that flow into the first large winning port 331 will flow into the first branch passage 334X.

An upstream detection sensor 391d is provided in the ball passage 332X upstream of the branching portion, and downstream detection sensors 338X, 339X are provided in the downstream of the branching portion, specifically the first branch passage 334X and the second branch passage 335X. The upstream detection sensor 391d and the downstream detection sensors 338X, 339X are connected to the main control device 162, which determines whether or not a prize has been won in the first variable winning device 64X based on the detection information (detection signal) from the upstream detection sensor 391d, and pays out a predetermined number of game balls if a prize has been won. In addition, the remaining status of game balls is monitored based on the detection information (detection signal) from the upstream detection sensor 391d and the downstream detection sensors 338X, 339X.

In the main control device 162 shown in this embodiment, when it is determined that a ball has entered the first branch passage 334X during the opening and closing execution mode based on detection information (detection signal) from the downstream detection sensor 338X attached to the first branch passage 334X, the lottery mode switches from the low probability mode to the high probability mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends (except when the above-mentioned special rate limiter is activated). In this embodiment, the first branch passage 334X corresponds to the "favorable ball entry section."

(Game Flow)
Next, the basic flow of the game will be described with reference to FIG.

(First normal gaming state)
In the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, a lottery for a big win and a special win is executed by the occurrence of a winning entry into the first actuation port 62a (more specifically, the lower actuation port 62aL) arranged in the game area PE (left route). In this embodiment, the first normal game state is a game state in which a difference is provided so that the player's advantage is the lowest among the first to third normal game states.

If any type of jackpot is obtained during the first normal game state, the game will transition to the first special game state (open/close execution mode). As already explained, in the first normal game state, there are two types of jackpots based on winning the first operating port 62a: a 2R special jackpot and a 10R special jackpot A, and the breakdown of these in the first normal game state is 66.5% for the 2R special jackpot and 33.5% for the 10R special jackpot A (see FIG. 37).

If a 10R special jackpot A occurs during the first normal game state, the game will transition to a second normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode after the first special game state ends, and if a 2R special jackpot occurs during the first normal game state, the game will transition to a third normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode after the first special game state ends.

(Second normal gaming state)
In the second normal game state, the variable display time of the pattern (special pattern 1) in the first actuation port display section D1 becomes long (1200 sec or 600 sec), and the variable display time of the pattern (special pattern 2) in the second actuation port display section D2 becomes short (1 sec or 5 sec). In other words, by shifting from the first normal game state to the second normal game state, the relationship between the length of the variable display time is reversed between the first actuation port display section D1 and the second actuation port display section D2 (see FIG. 35). During the second normal game state, the game ball will enter both the first actuation port 62a and the second actuation port 63a by firing the game ball to the right route, but the game will proceed with the game being mainly played on the second actuation port 63a due to the longer variable display time in the first actuation port display section D1.

When any type of jackpot is obtained in the second normal game state, the game transitions to the first special game state (open/close execution mode). As already explained, in the second normal game state, the jackpots based on winning the second actuation port 63a include a 10R special jackpot A and a 10R normal jackpot (see FIG. 37).

The pachinko machine shown in this embodiment is also equipped with two types of limiters using two consecutive number counters, as in the first embodiment. In the second normal game state, the consecutive number counters are updated when the above loop is repeated. Specifically, the 10R special jackpot A is a jackpot that corresponds to a transition to a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, and when the 10R special jackpot A is reached, the value of the time-saving consecutive number counter and the value of the special consecutive number counter are each increased by "1."

When the value of the time-saving consecutive number counter reaches the first reference value (corresponding to consecutive number = 10 times), the loop ends and the game transitions through the first special game state to the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode. At this time, the value of the time-saving consecutive number counter is cleared to 0. In contrast, when the game transitions from the first normal game state to the second normal game state, when the value of the time-saving consecutive number counter reaches the first reference value, the value of the special chance consecutive number counter does not reach the second reference value (corresponding to consecutive number = 40 times). Therefore, the value of the special chance consecutive number counter is carried over from the second normal game state to the third normal game state without being cleared to 0.

When the game transitions from the first normal game state to the second normal game state, the game can have up to 10 consecutive 10R special jackpots, including the 10R special jackpot A that triggered the transition. If the game continues to have 10R special jackpot A jackpots until the time-saving limiter is activated, the player can expect to win approximately 12,000 prize balls.

Here, the allocation for a 10R special jackpot A is 90%. When transitioning from the first normal game state to the second normal game state, the probability that the time-saving limiter will be activated (probability of completing the game) is approximately 65%. If a 10R normal jackpot occurs before the time-saving limiter is activated, the game will transition (demotion) to the first normal game state after the first special game state ends, but the probability of this is approximately 35%.

In this embodiment, when comparing the rate of increase in game balls in a short period of time, the second normal game state is higher than the third normal game state, but when comparing the expected increase in balls (expected value), the third normal game state is configured to be greater than the second normal game state. In other words, the player's advantage is different from the first embodiment in that the relationship is first normal game state < second normal game state < third normal game state. In other words, to aim for the third normal game state, which is the most advantageous for the player, by going from the first normal game state through the second normal game state, it is necessary to activate the time-saving limiter while avoiding a 10R normal jackpot during the second normal game state.

(Third normal gaming state)
As described above, the transition route to the third normal game state is roughly divided into two: a 2R certainty bonus jackpot during the first normal game state, and activation of the time-saving limiter during the second normal game state.

In the third normal game state, the variable display time of the image (special image 1) on the first actuation port display section D1 is short (0.1 sec or 5 sec), and the variable display time of the image (special image 2) on the second actuation port display section D2 is short (1200 sec or 600 sec). In other words, when the second normal game state is transitioned to the third normal game state, the relationship between the long and short variable display times is reversed (see FIG. 35). In other words, when the game ball is launched toward the right route as in the second normal game state, the game progresses with the first actuation port 62a as the main play. In contrast, when the first normal game state is transitioned to the third normal game state, the relationship between the long and short variable display times is maintained.

The transition to the third normal game state causes the support mode of the electric device 71 to switch from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. This means that the probability of winning through the first operating port 62a when the game ball is fired to the right route is lower than in the high-frequency support mode. However, most of the game times related to the first operating port 62a result in a special win, and the second variable winning device 65 is opened.

During the high-frequency support mode, most of the game balls are guided by the electric device 71 to the first operating port 62a, and the flow of game balls toward the second variable winning device 65 located downstream of the first operating port 62a (right operating port 62aR) is suppressed. In contrast, during the low-frequency support mode, a certain number of game balls pass through the electric device 71 and flow toward the second variable winning device 65, and it is set so that approximately one game ball wins the second variable winning device 65 with each opening. This reduces the loss of balls held by the player.

In addition, if a 2R special jackpot occurs in the third normal game state, the game transitions to the first special game state (open/close execution mode). A 2R special jackpot is a jackpot that corresponds to a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode, and after transitioning to the third normal game state, a loop of 2R special jackpot → first special game state → third normal game state will occur. Here, in the third normal game state, when a jackpot occurs as a result of winning the first operating port 62a, the breakdown is 99.8% for a 2R special jackpot and 0.2% for a 10R special jackpot A. In other words, most jackpots are 2R special jackpots.

Furthermore, in the lottery related to the first operating port 62a, 1/2 of the winnings will be special winnings. In this embodiment, the second special game state is entered in which the second variable winning device 65 is opened when a special winning occurs, which is the same as the first embodiment. However, the opening time of the second variable winning device 65 in this second special game state is 1.8 sec, and approximately two winnings can occur with one opening. In this way, when the second normal game state and the first special game state are looped, the second special game state intervenes, making it possible to continue playing while slightly increasing the number of balls held. In addition, in the second normal game state, the probability of a big win is 10 times that of the first normal game state, and a certain number of prize balls can be obtained by a 2R probability big win. Furthermore, the opening target in the case of a 2R probability big win is changed from the second variable winning device 65 to the first variable winning device 64, so the number of prize balls per round is also increased. Overall, in the third normal game state, by continuing to shoot the game ball in the right direction, it is possible to increase the number of balls in hand while playing, and the expected value will exceed that of the second normal game state.

In the third normal game state, since all jackpots correspond to the high probability mode, the time-saving consecutive count counter described above is not updated and remains at 0. In contrast, the special probability consecutive count counter is incremented by "1" each time a special probability jackpot occurs through the above loop. If the value of the special probability consecutive count counter has not reached the second reference value (equivalent to consecutive counts of 40), the above loop continues, and when the value of the special probability consecutive count counter reaches the second reference value (equivalent to consecutive counts of 40), the game transitions to the first normal game state after the first special game state ends.

Although the probability is extremely low, if a 10R special jackpot A occurs before the limiter set by the special jackpot counter is activated, the game will transition to the second normal game state. Even in this case, the special jackpot counter will continue to be updated. In other words, when transitioning from the third normal game state to the second normal game state, the subsequent behavior will change significantly depending on whether the difference between the special jackpot counter value and the second reference value exceeds the first reference value.

Specifically, if the difference between the value of the continuous number counter for the special probability and the second reference value exceeds the first reference value, the 10R special probability jackpot A will occur a total of 10 times, including the 10R special probability jackpot A that triggered the transition to the second normal game state, and it will be a chance to greatly increase the number of balls held again. On the other hand, if the difference between the value of the continuous number counter for the special probability and the second reference value is below the first reference value, the limiter by the continuous number counter for the time reduction will be activated before the limiter by the continuous number counter for the special probability is activated, and the game will return to the third normal game state after increasing the number of balls held to a certain extent. In this case, too, the value of the continuous number counter for the special probability is carried over to the third normal game state. In other words, when the game transitions from the third normal game state to the second normal game state and then returns to the third normal game state, the stay in the third normal game state will be shorter than the first transition to the third normal game state.

When the value of the time-saving consecutive number counter reaches the first reference value and the value of the special consecutive number counter reaches the second reference value, the game will transition from the second normal game state to the first normal game state.

Next, we will provide additional information on the relationship between the transition trigger to the third normal game state and the duration of the third normal game state. If the time-saving limiter is activated after transitioning from the first normal game state to the second normal game state and transitioning to the third normal game state occurs, the continuous play counter for special probability has already counted up by the first reference value related to the time-saving counter. In other words, the "remaining number of times" until the special probability limiter is activated = "second reference value" - "first reference". In contrast, if a 2R special probability jackpot occurs during the first normal game state, the value of the continuous play counter for special probability has been incremented by the amount of the 2R special probability jackpot when the third normal game state begins, so the "remaining number of times" until the special probability limiter is activated = "second reference value" - 1.

As already explained, the first reference value is greater than 1. For this reason, if a transition to the third normal gaming state occurs as a result of a 2R special jackpot during the first normal gaming state, the duration of stay in the third normal gaming state, i.e., the expectation of promotion to the second normal gaming state, will be higher than if a transition to the third normal gaming state occurs due to the activation of the time-saving limiter.

In the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, if the number of consecutive jackpots (10R special jackpot A) corresponding to the high frequency support mode stored in the time-saving consecutive number counter has not reached the specified number, the game returns to the second normal game state after the special game state triggered by the jackpot ends. If such a loop is repeated and the number of consecutive jackpots reaches the first reference value, the game transitions to the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. In other words, the arrival of the first reference value is the trigger for transition to the third normal game state. In the third normal game state, the probability of a special jackpot is higher than in the second normal game state, and transitions to the second special game state occur frequently. This makes it possible to play while increasing the number of balls held during the third normal game state. With the above configuration, a player hoping to transition to the third normal game state can aim to transition to the third normal game state while earning balls by repeatedly transitioning to the first special game state during the second normal game state, thereby favorably improving the player's satisfaction.

In this embodiment, the lottery involving the second operating port 63a is designed to allow a 10R normal jackpot to be won, and in order to move from the second normal game state to the third normal game state, it is necessary to consecutively win 10R special jackpots A while avoiding a 10R normal jackpot. With this kind of configuration, it is possible to appropriately increase the sense of tension during play in the second normal game state.

If a 10R normal jackpot occurs immediately after the transition to the third normal game state via the second normal game state and the third normal game state ends, there is a concern that the player's motivation to play in the third normal game state will rapidly decline. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this embodiment, the storage of reserved information related to the second actuation port 63a is not possible, and even if a 10R normal jackpot occurs in a play round related to the second actuation port 63a, the 10R normal jackpot is invalidated by the play round related to the first actuation port 62a (more specifically, the play round related to a jackpot or special win). In other words, a 10R normal jackpot is restricted from occurring after the transition to the third normal game state. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid a configuration that can result in a 10R normal jackpot becoming a factor that extremely shortens the stay time in the third normal game state, and to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

After the transition to the third normal gaming state, the third normal gaming state and the special gaming state will loop until the number of consecutive jackpots reaches the second reference value. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the duration of the stay in the third normal gaming state, and to effectively prevent the player from immediately degrading from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state immediately after the transition to the third normal gaming state.

Third Embodiment
In the first embodiment, after a large amount of balls are released by the loop between the second normal game state and the first special game state, the game is transitioned to the first normal game state via the third normal game state in which a large increase in the number of balls is unlikely to occur (low risk, low return). This creates a large number of balls (bias in balls) while suppressing excessive increase in gambling caused by the large increase. In this embodiment, although it is possible to solve the same problem as the problem solved in the first embodiment, the specific configuration for solving the problem is different from that of the first embodiment. Below, referring to Figures 40 to 42, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. Figure 40 is a schematic diagram showing an allocation table for each operating port, Figure 41 is a block diagram showing the flow of the game (game flow), and Figure 42 is a timing chart showing an example of the change in the number of balls held as the game progresses.

As shown in FIG. 40, the allocation table for each actuation port is stored for each type of normal game state. The allocation table for the second actuation port is the same as that in the first embodiment (see FIG. 12(b) and FIG. 40(b)). In contrast, the allocation table for the first actuation port is similar to the allocation table for the first actuation port shown in the first embodiment in that it is broadly divided into an allocation table for the first normal game state, an allocation table for the second normal game state, and an allocation table for the third normal game state, but the configuration of the allocation table for the third normal game state differs from that of the allocation table for the first actuation port shown in the first embodiment.

Specifically, for the allocation table for the third normal game state, among the winning type counter C2 values of "0" to "999", a total of 665 values from "0" to "664" (first result), a total of 333 values from "665" to "997" (second result), and a total of 2 values from "998" to "999" (third result) all correspond to a 2R special jackpot. As already explained, a 2R special jackpot is a jackpot that transitions to the third normal game state, which corresponds to a high probability mode and low frequency support mode, after the special game state (open/close execution mode) ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display time table for the jackpot result has also been partially changed from the first embodiment. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41, the variable display time of the image on the first actuation port display unit in the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode has been shortened from "5 sec" to "2 sec." As a result, when a jackpot (2R special jackpot) occurs during the third normal game state, the time required to transition to the first special game state is shortened.

In the first embodiment, the second normal game state and the first special game state are looped until the time-saving limiter is activated, and the expected upper limit of 12,000 prize balls are paid out. After that, the third normal game state, the first special game state, and the second special game state are looped until the probability limiter is activated, and the number of balls held is slightly reduced by the time the game transitions to the first normal game state, so that the actual number of prize balls is adjusted to about 11,900. In other words, the configuration is such that a strategy is generated as to whether or not to aim for the extremely low probability 10R probability jackpot A with an investment of 100 shots until the probability limiter is activated. In this embodiment, the second normal game state and the first special game state are looped until the time-saving limiter is activated, so that 11,000 prize balls, which is less than the expected upper limit, are paid out, and then the third normal game state, the first special game state, and the second special game state are looped until the probability limiter is activated, so that the number of balls held increases slightly by the time the game transitions to the first normal game state, and the actual number of prize balls is adjusted to about 11,100 (see FIG. 42). During the third normal game state, the number of balls held increases slightly due to frequent 2R probability jackpots and special jackpots, but when a jackpot is won in a lottery based on winning the first operating port 62a, the type is limited to be a 2R probability jackpot, and transition to the second normal game state, where a large number of balls can be expected, is limited. In other words, in the third normal game state, it is possible to acquire 100 game balls over a period of about 30 minutes (before the high probability limiter is activated), but there is no opportunity to acquire a large number of balls. With the configuration described above in detail, it is possible to create a large number of balls, while suppressing the excessive increase in gambling that results from this.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the first embodiment, during the third normal game state, the time for displaying the change in the pattern on the display unit D1 for the first actuation port is significantly shorter than the time for displaying the change in the pattern on the display unit D2 for the second actuation port, and the game progresses mainly around the game times related to the first actuation port 62a. Although the game times related to the second actuation port 63a may result in a 10R special jackpot A corresponding to the transition to the second normal game state, the 10R special jackpot A is substantially nullified by a special win or special jackpot in the game times related to the first actuation port 62a. As a result, during the third normal game state, the transition opportunity is limited so that the game transitions to the second normal game state, where a large amount of balls can be expected if a 10R special jackpot A (0.2%) is won based on the winning of the first actuation port before the special jackpot limiter is activated. In contrast, in this embodiment, when a jackpot occurs during the third normal gaming state, the result of the game associated with the second actuation port 63a is not invalidated, but the result is valid, diversifying the trigger for transition to the second normal gaming state. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 43 to 45, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. Figure 43 is a schematic diagram showing an allocation table for each actuation port, Figure 44 is a schematic diagram showing a part of the variable display time table, and Figure 45 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the variable display time and the trigger for transition to the special gaming state.

(First operating port sorting table)
As shown in FIG. 43(a), the allocation table for the first operating port is broadly divided into an allocation table for the first normal gaming state, an allocation table for the second normal gaming state, and an allocation table for the third normal gaming state.

For the allocation table for the first normal game state, of the winning type counter C2 values of "0" to "999", a total of 665 values (first result) from "0" to "664" correspond to a 2R guaranteed jackpot, a total of 330 values (second result) from "665" to "994" correspond to a 10R guaranteed jackpot A, a total of 3 values (third result) from "995" to "997" correspond to a 10R guaranteed jackpot A, and a total of 2 values (fourth result) from "998" to "999" correspond to a 10R guaranteed jackpot A.

For the allocation table for the second normal game state, of the winning type counter C2 values of "0" to "999", a total of 665 values (first result) from "0" to "664" correspond to a 2R guaranteed jackpot, a total of 330 values (second result) from "665" to "994" correspond to a 10R guaranteed jackpot A, a total of 3 values (third result) from "995" to "997" correspond to a 10R guaranteed jackpot A, and a total of 2 values (fourth result) from "998" to "999" correspond to a 10R guaranteed jackpot A.

For the allocation table for the third normal game state, of the winning type counter C2 values of "0" to "999", a total of 665 values (first result) from "0" to "664" correspond to a 2R certainty special jackpot, a total of 330 values (second result) from "665" to "994" correspond to a 2R certainty special jackpot, a total of 3 values (third result) from "995" to "997" correspond to a 10R certainty special jackpot C, and a total of 2 values (fourth result) from "998" to "999" correspond to a 10R certainty special jackpot A.

(Distribution table for second operating port)
As shown in FIG. 43(b), the second operating port allocation table is broadly divided into an allocation table for the first normal game state, an allocation table for the second normal game state, and an allocation table for the third normal game state.

For the allocation table for the first normal game state, a total of 1000 values of the winning type counter C2 from "0" to "999" correspond to the 10R guaranteed jackpot B. For the allocation table for the second normal game state, a total of 1000 values of the winning type counter C2 from "0" to "999" correspond to the 10R guaranteed jackpot A. For the allocation table for the third normal game state, a total of 1000 values of the winning type counter C2 from "0" to "999" correspond to the 10R guaranteed jackpot A. The 10R guaranteed jackpot A is a jackpot that corresponds to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, and in this embodiment, if a 10R guaranteed jackpot A occurs based on an entry into the second operating port during the third normal game state, the third normal game state can be switched to the second normal game state.

The 10R special jackpot C is a jackpot that supports high probability mode and low frequency support mode, just like the 10R special jackpot B. However, there is a difference in the variable display time that is set compared to the 10R special jackpot B. Below, the variable display time that is set during the third normal game state will be explained with reference to FIG. 44. Note that the variable display time that is set during the first normal game state and the second normal game state is the same as in the first embodiment, so an explanation will be omitted.

(Variable display time)
First, the variable display time table for the first operating port referred to during the third normal game state will be described. In the variable display time table for the first operating port, when the game number related to the first operating port 62a corresponds to a complete miss, the variable display time is "0.1 sec", when it corresponds to a special win, the variable display time is "0.1 sec", when it corresponds to a 2R special big win, the variable display time is "5 sec", when it corresponds to a 10R special big win A, the variable display time is "5 sec", when it corresponds to a 10R special big win C, the variable display time is "601 sec".

Next, we will explain the variable display time table for the second actuation port that is referenced during the third normal game state. In the variable display time table for the second actuation port, it is specified that the variable display time is "1200 sec" when the game turn related to the second actuation port 63a corresponds to a complete miss, and the variable display time is "600 sec" when it corresponds to a 10R special jackpot A.

In other words, in this embodiment, the variable display time set when a winning entry into the first actuation port 62a during the third normal game state results in a 10R guaranteed jackpot C is longer than the variable display time set when a winning entry into the second actuation port 63a during the third normal game state results in a 10R guaranteed jackpot A, and is shorter than the variable display time set when a winning entry into the second actuation port 63a during the third normal game state results in a complete miss.

Now, referring to Figure 45, we will illustrate the flow of play during the third normal game state.

In the example shown in FIG. 45(a), a winning entry occurs in the second actuation port 63a at the timing of ta0, and the variable display of the pattern is started on the second actuation port display section D2. This game round corresponds to a 10R guaranteed jackpot A, and the variable display time of the pattern is set to "600 sec". During the game round related to the second actuation port display section D2, the game round related to the first actuation port display section D1 is repeated, and the game round corresponding to the special win is started at the timing of ta1. In the game round corresponding to the special win, the variable display time of the pattern is set to "0.1 sec", and the pattern corresponding to the special win is displayed (confirmed display) on the first actuation port display section D1 at the timing of ta2, which is 0.1 sec after the timing of ta2. At this timing, the variable display of the pattern on the second actuation port display section D2 is forcibly terminated by displaying the pattern corresponding to the miss as a fixed display (confirmed display). In other words, even if a winning entry into the second actuation port 63a results in a 10R guaranteed jackpot A and a transition to the first special game state is averted, a winning entry into the first actuation port 62a results in a special win, and the 10R guaranteed jackpot A is cancelled.

The same applies to the behavior when a winning entry into the first actuation port 62a results in a 2R guaranteed jackpot or a 10R guaranteed jackpot A. In other words, if the game round related to the first actuation port display D1 ends before the game round related to the second actuation port display D2 ends, even if a winning entry into the second actuation port 63a results in a 10R guaranteed jackpot A and a transition to the first special game state is averted, the 10R guaranteed jackpot A will be canceled.

In addition, if a game round related to the first operating port display section D1 (special win, 2R guaranteed jackpot, 10R guaranteed jackpot) ends while a game round corresponding to a miss is being played on the second operating port display section D2, the game round related to the second operating port display section D2 will be forcibly ended midway.

In the example shown in FIG. 45(b), a winning entry occurs in the second actuation port 63a at timing tb0, and the display of changing patterns begins on the second actuation port display section D2. This play round corresponds to a 10R guaranteed jackpot A, and the time period for displaying changing patterns is set to "600 sec." At timing tb1 during the play round related to the second actuation port display section D2, the play round corresponding to a 10R guaranteed jackpot C begins. In the play round corresponding to a 10R guaranteed jackpot C, the time period for displaying changing patterns is set to "601 sec."

The display of the changing patterns on the first actuation port display D1 and the display of the changing patterns on the second actuation port display D2 are executed in parallel, but the display of the changing patterns on the second actuation port display D2 ends at tb2, which is before tb4, when the display time of the changing patterns on the first actuation port display D1 is scheduled to elapse, and the pattern corresponding to the 10R special jackpot C is displayed (determined display). In other words, in this embodiment, if a 10R special jackpot A is obtained based on a win on the second actuation port 63a and a 10R special jackpot C is obtained based on a win on the first actuation port 62a while a play round related to the 10R special jackpot A is being played, the play round on the second actuation port display D2 will exceptionally reach its expiration date.

At the timing tb3 when the image corresponding to the 10R special jackpot A is displayed on the second operation port display D2, the game transitions to the first special game state triggered by the 10R special jackpot A. After the first special game state ends, the game transitions (promotions) to the second normal game state on the condition that the special jackpot limiter is not activated.

Next, referring to FIG. 45(c), we will explain the behavior when a 10R special jackpot C occurs while a game round related to a miss is being played on the second operating port display D2.

In the example shown in FIG. 45(c), a winning entry occurs in the second actuation port 63a at timing tc0, and the display of changing patterns begins on the second actuation port display section D2. This play round corresponds to a miss, and the time period for displaying changing patterns is set to "1200 sec." At timing tc1 during the play round related to the second actuation port display section D2, the play round corresponding to a 10R special jackpot C begins. In the play round corresponding to a 10R special jackpot C, the time period for displaying changing patterns is set to "601 sec."

The display of the changing patterns on the first actuation port display section D1 and the display of the changing patterns on the second actuation port display section D2 are executed in parallel, but the display of the changing patterns on the second actuation port display section D2 ends at tc2, which is before tc4, when the display time of the changing patterns on the first actuation port display section D1 is scheduled to elapse, and the pattern corresponding to the 10R sure-win jackpot C is displayed as a static display (confirmed display). In this case, the game round related to the second actuation port 63a is forcibly ended, and the pattern corresponding to a miss is forcibly displayed as a static display (confirmed display) on the second actuation port display section D2.

At the timing tc3 when the image corresponding to the 10R special jackpot C is displayed on the first operating port display D1, the game transitions to the first special game state triggered by the 10R special jackpot C. After the first special game state ends, the game returns to the third normal game state on the condition that the special jackpot limiter is not activated.

In this embodiment, if a 10R special jackpot C occurs during the third normal game state, a video (special effect) prepared in advance for a 10R special jackpot C is displayed. When a 10R special jackpot C occurs, it is not indicated to the player which of the behaviors shown in FIG. 45(b) and FIG. 45(c) will occur. Then, during the first special game state, which occurs at or immediately after tb2, tc2, tb3, tc3, it is indicated to the player whether the current jackpot is a 10R special jackpot A or a 10R special jackpot C. In other words, it is indicated whether there will be a transition (promotion) to the second normal game state.

The special effects can be a first special effect with a story that is executed when the remaining time until the end of a game round is equal to or greater than a specified time, and a second special effect without a story that is executed when the remaining time until the end of a game round is less than the specified time. The remaining time can be calculated at or before the start of a game round corresponding to a 10R special jackpot C, and the first special effect and the second special effect can be used differently based on the calculation result.

<Modification 1>
In the fourth embodiment described above, the configuration is such that the 10R certain jackpot A, which triggers a transition to the second normal game state, can be won in a lottery based on winning the first operating port 62a, but it is also possible to change this and configure the lottery based on winning the first operating port 62a so that the 10R certain jackpot A, which triggers a transition to the second normal game state, is not won.

<Modification 2>
In the fourth embodiment, the lottery based on the winning of the second actuation port 63a is configured to allow the player to win the 10R certainty bonus A, which is a trigger for transition to the second normal game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. As in the first embodiment, the lottery based on the winning of the second actuation port 63a may not allow the player to win the 10R certainty bonus A, which is a trigger for transition to the second normal game state.

<Modification 3>
In the fourth embodiment, when the 10R sure-variable jackpot C is generated based on the winning of the first actuation port 62a during the third normal game state, the special variation is generated with the variation display time set to "601 sec", but this is not limited to this. The configuration may be such that whether or not the special variation is generated is determined by a lottery other than the lottery for the type of jackpot. Specifically, the configuration may be such that the presence or absence of the special variation is determined by the setting process for the third normal game state executed by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162. Hereinafter, the setting process for the third normal game state will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 46. The setting process for the third normal game state is a process executed as part of step S508 in the first actuation port variation start process of FIG. 19 when the game state is the third normal game state.

In the third normal game state setting process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the game round to be started this time (the game round related to the first operating port 62a) corresponds to a complete miss. If a positive determination is made in step S1701, the process proceeds to step S1702. In step S1702, a process for setting the variable display time for a complete miss is executed, and the third normal game state setting process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1701, the process proceeds to step S1703. In step S1703, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to a special win. If a positive determination is made in step S1703, the process proceeds to step S1704. In step S1704, a process for setting the variable display time for a special win is executed, and the process for setting the third normal game state is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1703, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1705, it is determined whether or not a game turn related to the second actuation port 63a is in progress. If a positive judgment is made in step S1705, the process proceeds to step S1706. In step S1706, it is determined whether or not the game turn related to the second actuation port 63a corresponds to a 10R special jackpot A. If a positive judgment is made in step S1706, the process proceeds to step S1707.

In step S1707, it is determined whether the number of times remaining until the high probability limiter is activated is N or more (more specifically, it is equal to or greater than the first reference value, which is the threshold value for activating the time-saving limiter). If a positive determination is made in step S1707, the process proceeds to step S1708. In step S1708, the lottery process for the special variation is executed by referring to the special variation lottery table stored in ROM 603 and the value of the special variation lottery counter stored in the lottery counter buffer 631 of RAM 604.

If the special variation is won in the lottery process of step S1708, a positive judgment is made in step S1709 and the process proceeds to step S1710. In step S1710, special setting processing for a jackpot is executed. Specifically, the variation display time for the current game round is set to "601 sec." If the lottery of step S1708 is not won, a negative judgment is made in step S1709 and the process proceeds to step S1711. In step S1711, normal setting processing for a jackpot is executed. Specifically, the variation display time for the current game round is set to "5 sec." Note that even if a negative judgment is made in any of steps S1705, S1706, or S1707, normal setting processing is executed in step S1711.

In this way, if a jackpot is won by winning the first operating port 62a, regardless of the type of jackpot, the game can be transitioned (promoted) to the second normal game state, which can ideally increase attention to the game.

In addition, in this modified example 1, the special variation can only occur in a game that results in a jackpot, but instead of or in addition to this, it is also possible to configure the special variation to occur in a game that results in a special win.

<Modification 4>
In the fourth embodiment, it is also possible to configure the player to win a normal jackpot (see the third embodiment) by a lottery based on the winning of the second actuation port 63a. In this case, the time for displaying the variation of the image in the second actuation port display section D2 for a game that results in a normal jackpot (a jackpot that triggers a transition to the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode) may be set to "600 sec" in the same manner as in the case of a 10R probability jackpot.

Fifth embodiment
In the first embodiment, when a 10R special jackpot A occurs during the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the game is moved (promoted) to the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. In this configuration, the count information of the special limiter (value of the special consecutive number counter) is carried over even when moving from the third normal game state to the second normal game state. Therefore, the special limiter may operate before the time-saving limiter operates in the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. In the first embodiment, when such an event occurs, the game is moved (demoted) to the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, and the above loop in the second normal game state is repeated to suppress the occurrence of excessive balls that exceed the expected amount. In this embodiment, the specific configuration for suppressing the excessive balls is different from that of the first embodiment. The characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described below with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 47, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

In the second normal game state, which corresponds to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode, the game progresses mainly with the game times related to the second actuation port 63a. Here, all of the lotteries based on winning the second actuation port 63a correspond to the 10R special jackpot A, and the second normal game state and the first special game state triggered by the 10R special jackpot A are looped, allowing the player to greatly increase the number of balls they have.

During the second normal game state, each time a 10R special jackpot A occurs, the values of the special jackpot consecutive times counter and the time-saving consecutive times counter are updated ('1' is added). As already explained, when the first normal game state is transitioned to the second normal game state, the updates of the special jackpot consecutive times counter and the time-saving consecutive times counter both start from '0'. Therefore, before the value of the special jackpot consecutive times counter becomes the second reference value and the special jackpot limiter is activated, the value of the time-saving consecutive times counter becomes the first reference value and the time-saving limiter is activated. Therefore, when the first normal game state is transitioned to the second normal game state, the time-saving limiter is activated and the second normal game state is transitioned (demotion) to the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode.

In contrast, when transitioning to the second normal game state via the third normal game state, the behavior may be different from the above. Specifically, the third normal game state corresponds to the high probability mode as described above. For this reason, the value of the continuous number of times for special probability is carried over between the second normal game state and the third normal game state, and an event may occur in which the number of times remaining until the time-saving limiter is activated exceeds the number of times remaining until the special probability limiter is activated at the time of transition from the third normal game state to the second normal game state.

If the high probability limiter is activated before the time-saving limiter is activated in the second normal game state, the game transitions to the fourth normal game state, which corresponds to a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode. In the fourth normal game state, the electric device 71 supports winning in the first actuation port 62a, but the time (e.g., 1 sec) of the changing picture display in the second actuation port display section D2 is shorter than the time (e.g., 1200 sec) of the changing picture display in the first actuation port display section D1, and the game progresses mainly with the play times related to the second actuation port 63a.

In addition, in the fourth normal game state, the game will continue until 100 games related to the second operating port 63a have been played, and when 100 games have been played, the game will transition to the first normal game state.

In the fourth normal game state, when a jackpot is won by lottery based on winning the second operating port 63a, all distributions are 10R guaranteed jackpot A. Therefore, even though this is a low probability mode with a low jackpot probability, if a jackpot is won during the fourth normal game state, the game will transition to the second normal game state (except when the time-saving limiter is activated).

When transitioning from the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state, the value of the continuous number of times for the special probability is reset (cleared to 0). Therefore, if the player can transition (promote) from the fourth normal game state to the second normal game state, he or she can enjoy a total of approximately 12,000 balls, including the balls that were output during the previous second normal game state, the balls that were output during the fourth normal game state, and the balls that were output during the subsequent second normal game state.

However, if the special chance limiter is activated during the second normal game state and the game transitions (demotions) to the fourth normal game state, the value of the time-saving consecutive number counter is carried over. The value of the time-saving consecutive number counter carried over to the fourth normal game state is also carried over when the game transitions (promotions) from the fourth normal game state to the second normal game state. Therefore, when the second normal game state → fourth normal game state → second normal game state occurs, the upper limit of balls dispensed in the subsequent second normal game state is kept low, and even if a pullback occurs in the fourth normal game state as described above, excessive balls dispensed in a short period of time is suppressed.

<Other embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the contents of the above-mentioned embodiments, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above-mentioned embodiments, or may be applied in combination with some or all of the following embodiments. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in the above-mentioned embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exerted) of each of the configurations to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration formed by a combination of the embodiments, or may be applied in combination with some or all of the following embodiments.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, when a 10R special jackpot A occurs during the third normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the third normal gaming state is promoted to the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. However, such a promotion route is not essential. It is sufficient that the second normal gaming state is configured to be at least more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state, and the specific configuration for favoring the third normal gaming state over the first normal gaming state is optional. For example, instead of or in addition to the configuration related to the above promotion route, a configuration may be adopted in which a 10R normal jackpot X can be won during the third normal game state, and when this 10R normal jackpot X is won, a transition to a normal game state X corresponding to a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode is made, and when a jackpot is won in the normal game state X, a transition to the second normal game state is confirmed, etc., so that the probability of transitioning to the second normal game state during the normal game state X is higher than the probability of transitioning to the second normal game state during the third normal game state. Note that, in order to make the normal game state X more advantageous to the player than the third normal game state, it is preferable to set the base in the normal game state X (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of game balls shot) to be equal to or higher than the base in the third normal game state.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, the first reference value (10) of the time-saving limiter is smaller than the difference (30) between the second reference value (40) of the high probability limiter and the first reference value of the high probability limiter, but this is not limited to this. The value of the first reference value of the time-saving limiter may be larger than the difference between the second reference value of the high probability limiter and the first reference value of the high probability limiter, or the value of the first reference value of the time-saving limiter may be the same as the difference between the second reference value of the high probability limiter and the first reference value of the high probability limiter.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the number of balls held is slightly decreased in the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. However, the number of balls held may be maintained during the third normal game state, and the 10R certain jackpot A, which is a trigger for transition to the second normal game state, may be excluded from the types of jackpots that are generated by winning through the first operating port 62a. In this case, instead of limiting the large number of balls that are released by transitioning (promotion) to the second normal game state during the third normal game state, a game may be realized that aims to increase the number of balls held by over-winning (when the variable winning device 64 is opened) during a 2R certain jackpot, which occurs less frequently than a special jackpot. In this case, it is recommended to add a flow path toward the first variable winning device 64 to reduce the difficulty of over-winning. For example, it is recommended to form a guide passage that guides some of the game balls that have passed through the second operating ball entry section 63 in the outer route to the first variable winning device 64.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the transition routes to the third normal game state include a route from the first normal game state via the second normal game state and a route that transitions directly from the first normal game state. However, it is possible to omit the route that transitions directly from the first normal game state to the third normal game state.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, in the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode, the display time of the changing patterns on each of the actuation port display sections D1 and D2 is set to be different so that the game progresses with the play times related to the first actuation port display section D1 being the main focus. However, the display time of the changing patterns on each of the actuation port display sections D1 and D2 may be changed arbitrarily as long as such functionality is ensured.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, when play is continuously performed (when the game ball is continuously launched), the time required for transition from the first normal game state to the second normal game state and the time-saving limiter to operate and transition to the third normal game state is approximately 30 minutes, and when play is subsequently continuously performed (when the game ball is continuously launched), the time required for transition to the first normal game state is approximately 30 minutes when the special rate limiter is operated in the third normal game state. The first reference value of the time-saving consecutive number counter and the second reference value of the special rate consecutive number counter are set so that the respective required times are equivalent, but this is not limited to the above.

The first reference value of the time-saving consecutive number counter and the second reference value of the probability variable consecutive number counter may be set so that the time required for the first normal game state to transition to the second normal game state and the time-saving limiter to operate and transition to the third normal game state when the game is played continuously (when the game ball is continuously launched) is clearly longer than the time required for the probability variable limiter to operate in the third normal game state and transition to the first normal game state when the game is subsequently played continuously (when the game ball is continuously launched). For example, the difference between the first reference value and the second reference value may be smaller than that in the first embodiment.

The first reference value of the time-saving consecutive number counter and the second reference value of the probability variable consecutive number counter may be set so that the time required for the first normal game state to transition to the second normal game state and the time-saving limiter to operate and transition to the third normal game state when the game is played continuously (when the game ball is continuously fired) is clearly shorter than the time required for the probability variable limiter to operate in the third normal game state and transition to the first normal game state when the game is subsequently played continuously (when the game ball is continuously fired). For example, the difference between the first reference value and the second reference value may be larger than that in the first embodiment.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the second variable winning device 65 corresponding to the low frequency winning mode and the first variable winning device 64 corresponding to the high frequency winning mode are provided separately, but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to integrate the first variable winning device 64 and the second variable winning device 65 into a single variable winning device.

It is also possible to set the first variable winning device 64 as the opening target when the low frequency winning mode is selected, and the second variable winning device 65 as the opening target when the high frequency winning mode is selected.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, a difference is provided so that the number of prize balls based on one win in the second variable winning device 65 is less than the number of prize balls based on one win in the first variable winning device 64, but this is not limited to this. A difference may be provided so that the number of prize balls based on one win in the second variable winning device 65 is more than the number of prize balls based on one win in the first variable winning device 64, or the number of prize balls based on one win in the second variable winning device 65 may be the same as the number of prize balls based on one win in the first variable winning device 64.

(9) The right-side operating ball entry section 62R shown in each of the above embodiments may be disposed at a position on the right route that corresponds to the first variable winning device 64 and the second variable winning device 65.

(10) The second operating ball entry section 63 may be disposed on the flow path (internal route) leading to the first variable winning device 64 or the second variable winning device 65.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the game times related to the first actuation port 62a and the game times related to the second actuation port 63a are configured to be able to be executed while one is being executed, but this is not limited to the above. It is also possible to configure the game times related to the first actuation port 62a and the game times related to the second actuation port 63a so that one cannot be executed while the other is being executed. In such a configuration, the game times related to the first actuation port 62a may be configured to be executed in priority over the game times related to the second actuation port 63a, or the game times related to the second actuation port 63a may be configured to be executed in priority over the game times related to the first actuation port 62a. It is also possible to configure the game times to be executed in the order in which winning takes place.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the protrusions 335a, 336a are provided as a deceleration means for decelerating the game ball rolling on the shutter 333 of the first variable winning device 64, but the specific configuration for gaining the required time to pass over the shutter 333 is arbitrary. For example, the upper limit of the shutter 333 may be provided with irregularities to make the flow path meander up and down.

The second variable winning device 65 may also be provided with a deceleration means (e.g., a configuration equivalent to the protrusions 335a, 336a) for decelerating the game ball rolling on the shutter 343.

(13) In the first variable winning device 64 and the second variable winning device 65 shown in each of the above embodiments, the shutters 333, 343 are configured to slide forward and backward to switch between the open and closed states, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the shutters may be configured to slide left and right or up and down to switch between the open and closed states. Note that the shutters 333, 343 do not necessarily need to be of the sliding type, and may also be of the rotating type.

In addition, the right-side operating ball entrance section 62R shown in the above embodiment is configured to switch between open and closed states by rotating the movable piece of the electric role 71 parallel to the front surface of the game board 60, but this is not limited to this. For example, the movable piece may be configured to switch between open and closed states by rotating in a direction intersecting the front surface of the game board. Note that the movable piece does not necessarily have to be of the rotating type, and it can also be of the sliding type.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, the lottery based on winning through the second actuation port 63a does not result in a special win, but this may be modified so that the lottery based on winning through the second actuation port 63a also results in a special win.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, the display of changing patterns on the actuation port display units D1, D2 and the display of changing patterns on the pattern display device 75 are started based on the winning/losing lottery (determination process) being performed in the main control unit 162, but this is not limited to the above. It is also possible to start the display of changing patterns on the actuation port display units D1, D2 and the display of changing patterns on the pattern display device 75 prior to the winning/losing lottery (determination process) being performed in the main control unit 162.

(16) In each of the above embodiments, the number of consecutive jackpots (first reference value) at which the time-saving limiter activates is set to be less than the number of consecutive jackpots (second reference value) at which the special rate limiter activates. However, the number of consecutive jackpots (first reference value) at which the time-saving limiter activates may be set to be greater than the number of consecutive jackpots (second reference value) at which the special rate limiter activates, or the number of consecutive jackpots (first reference value) at which the time-saving limiter activates may be set to be the same as the number of consecutive jackpots (second reference value) at which the special rate limiter activates.

(17) The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines that are different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric device opens a predetermined number of times when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a jackpot is awarded when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines equipped with other devices, arrange ball machines, mahjong ball machines, and other gaming machines.

The present invention can also be applied to non-pinball gaming machines, such as slot machines, which have multiple reels with multiple patterns circumferentially attached, and which start the rotation of the reels by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and which, after the reels stop when a stop switch is operated or a predetermined time has passed, award the player with a special prize, such as a medal payout, if a specific pattern or combination of specific patterns is formed on a winning line visible through a display window.

Furthermore, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, which is equipped with a take-in device and starts the reels spinning by operating a start lever after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in a storage section have been taken in by the take-in device.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes characteristic configurations extracted from the above-mentioned embodiment, while indicating effects, etc., as necessary. Note that in the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-mentioned embodiment are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses, etc.

<Features Group A>
The following feature group A was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means which launches gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a bonus such as a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature A1. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 222) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry sections (general winning opening 61, operational winning sections 62, 63, variable winning devices 64, 65) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating ball scoring section 62, 63) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group for a big win);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to a judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (e.g., the first normal game state to the third normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable mechanism (electric device 71) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) is provided,
a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state for a longer period than in the first switching mode are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means;
a low probability mode in which the probability of a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information being obtained is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information being obtained is relatively high, as a judgment mode (lottery mode) in which the judgment means makes the judgment;
The determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information includes a determination result that triggers a transition to the high probability mode and a determination result that triggers a transition to the second switching mode,
A first storage means (a continuous number counter for a probability change) is provided for storing the number of consecutive times when the judgment result by the judgment means becomes a judgment result that triggers a transition to the high probability mode, and when the continuous number stored in the first storage means reaches a first specified number (for example, 40 times), a first special transition means transitions to a game state corresponding to the low probability mode among the predetermined game states upon the end of the special game state (a probability change limiter function in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
a second storage means (a continuous number counter for time reduction) for storing the number of consecutive times when the judgment result by the judgment means becomes a judgment result that triggers a transition to the second switching mode, and a second special transition means (a time reduction limiter function in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the predetermined gaming state to a gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode upon termination of the special gaming state when the continuous number stored in the second storage means reaches a second specified number (for example, 10 times);
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when a specific judgment result (10R special jackpot A) corresponding to the predetermined judgment information occurs during a gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, which is one of the predetermined gaming states, both the consecutive number of times stored in the first storage means and the consecutive number of times stored in the second storage means are updated.

According to feature A1, in a game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, a ball entering the starting ball entry section and a judgment (lottery) based on the ball entering are favored. In this game state, the consecutive number stored in the first storage means and the consecutive number stored in the second storage means are updated by a specific judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information. Here, when the consecutive number stored in the first storage means (the consecutive number of judgment results that trigger a transition to the high probability mode) reaches a first specified number, a transition is made to a game state corresponding to the low probability mode, and when the consecutive number stored in the second storage means (the consecutive number of judgment results that trigger a transition to the second switching mode) reaches a second specified number, a transition is made to a game state corresponding to the first switching mode. In other words, the subsequent development of the game will change significantly depending on whether a transition occurs by the first special transition means or the second special transition means. With this configuration, monotony of the game can be suppressed and it can contribute to increasing the attention to the game.

Feature A2. The gaming machine described in Feature A1, characterized in that the first specified number of times and the second specified number of times are different.

As shown in feature A2, if the first and second specified numbers are configured to be different, then in the second game state, a branch will occur between a case where a transition occurs by the first special transition means and a case where a transition occurs by the second special transition means. This is preferable in terms of preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

Feature A3. The gaming machine described in Feature A1 or Feature A2, wherein the second specified number of times is less than the first specified number of times.

According to feature A3, the high probability mode is more likely to be maintained in the transition destination from the game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, and the opportunity to obtain a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information can be maintained. This is preferable in terms of suppressing monotony of the game in the transition destination, compared to a configuration in which the second switching mode is more likely to be maintained in the transition destination from the game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, for example.

Feature A4. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A game ball launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 222) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry sections (general winning opening 61, operational winning sections 62, 63, variable winning devices 64, 65) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating ball scoring section 62, 63) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group for a big win);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to a judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (e.g., the first normal game state to the third normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable mechanism (electric device 71) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) is provided,
a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state for a longer period than in the first switching mode are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means;
a low probability mode in which the probability of a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information being obtained is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information being obtained is relatively high, as a judgment mode (lottery mode) in which the judgment means makes the judgment;
As the predetermined gaming states, a first gaming state (first normal gaming state) corresponding to the low probability mode and the first switching mode, a second gaming state (second normal gaming state) corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, and a third gaming state (third normal gaming state) corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode are provided.
The determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information includes a determination result that triggers a transition to the high probability mode and a determination result that triggers a transition to the second switching mode,
A first storage means (a continuous number counter for a probability change) is provided for storing the number of consecutive times when the judgment result by the judgment means becomes a judgment result that triggers a transition to the high probability mode, and when the continuous number stored in the first storage means reaches a first specified number (for example, 40 times), a first special transition means transitions to a game state corresponding to the low probability mode among the predetermined game states upon the end of the special game state (a probability change limiter function in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
a second storage means (a continuous number counter for time reduction) for storing the number of consecutive times when the judgment result by the judgment means becomes a judgment result that triggers a transition to the second switching mode, and a second special transition means (a time reduction limiter function in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the predetermined gaming state to a gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode upon termination of the special gaming state when the continuous number stored in the second storage means reaches a second specified number (for example, 10 times);
The second specified number of times is less than the first specified number of times,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when a specific judgment result (10R certainty jackpot A) occurs during the second gaming state, which triggers a transition to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, both the consecutive number of times stored in the first storage means and the consecutive number of times stored in the second storage means are updated.

According to feature A4, in the second game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, the ball entering the starting ball entry section and the judgment (lottery) based on the ball entering are favored. In this second game state, the consecutive number stored in the first storage means and the consecutive number stored in the second storage means are updated by a specific judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information. Here, when the consecutive number stored in the first storage means (the consecutive number of judgment results that trigger a transition to the high probability mode) reaches a first specified number, the game state transitions to the low probability mode, and when the consecutive number stored in the second storage means (the consecutive number of judgment results that trigger a transition to the second switching mode) reaches a second specified number, the game state transitions to the first switching mode. In other words, the subsequent development of the game will change significantly depending on which of the two types of limiters is activated. With this configuration, monotony of the game can be suppressed and the attention to the game can be increased.

In particular, because the second specified number of times is less than the first specified number of times, a transition by the first special transition means is more likely to occur before a transition by the second special transition means occurs. In other words, the high probability mode is more likely to be maintained at the transition destination from a game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, and the opportunity to obtain a judgment result corresponding to the specified judgment information can be maintained. This is preferable in terms of suppressing monotony of play at the transition destination, compared to a configuration in which the second switching mode is more likely to be maintained at the transition destination from a game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode.

Feature A5. The gaming machine described in Feature A4, characterized in that the second special transition means transitions to the third gaming state upon termination of the special gaming state when the determination result by the determination means during the third gaming state becomes the specific determination result and the number of consecutive times stored in the second storage means reaches the second specified number.

As shown in this feature, if the game state is transitioned to the third game state when a specific judgment result occurs during the third game state and the number of consecutive wins reaches a second specified number, the effect shown in feature A4 can be effectively achieved.

Feature A6. When the second game state is transitioned to the third game state by the second special transition means, the number of consecutive times stored in the second storage means is reset, whereas the number of consecutive times stored in the first storage means is maintained.
In the third gaming state, the number of consecutive wins stored in the first storage means is updated when the determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result that triggers a transition to the high probability mode.
The gaming machine described in feature A5, wherein the first special transition means is configured to transition to the first gaming state upon the end of the special gaming state when the judgment means determines during the third gaming state that this is a judgment result that triggers a transition to the high probability mode and the consecutive number of times stored in the first storage means reaches the first specified number.

According to feature A6, after the second special transition means transitions from the second gaming state to the third gaming state, the consecutive number stored in the first storage means is updated by a determination result that triggers a transition to the high probability mode. Then, when the consecutive number reaches a first specified number, a transition is made to the first gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. By configuring the limiter to operate in stages in this way, the diversification of games as shown in feature A4 can be suitably achieved.

Feature A7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A4 to A6, characterized in that the number of consecutive plays stored in the first storage means when transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state is matched with the number of consecutive plays stored in the second storage means.

Feature A7 prevents two types of limiters from operating simultaneously, and ideally diversifies gameplay by activating limiters in stages.

Feature A8. When the determination result by the determination means during the first gaming state is a determination result that triggers a transition to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, a means for transitioning to the second gaming state upon the end of the special gaming state is provided;
The first special transition means has a means for resetting the number of consecutive times stored in the first storage means when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to a transition to the low probability mode or when the first special transition means transitions to a game state corresponding to the low probability mode;
The gaming machine described in any one of Features A4 to A7, characterized in that the second special transition means has a means for resetting the consecutive number of times stored in the second memory means when the judgment result by the judgment means becomes a judgment result corresponding to a transition to the first switching mode or when the second special transition means transitions to a gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode.

According to feature A8, when the first game state is transitioned to the second game state, the number of consecutive times stored in the first storage means and the number of consecutive times stored in the second storage means will match. With this configuration, the function of shifting the timing of the limiter activation depending on the difference between the first specified number and the second specified number (specifically, the function of the limiter activated by the second special movement means being activated first) can be effectively utilized.

Feature A9. As a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information in the third gaming state, a first judgment result (2R probability variable big win) which is a transition trigger to the high probability mode and the first switching mode, and a second judgment result (10R probability variable big win A) which is a transition trigger to the high probability mode and the second switching mode are provided;
When the second determination result is reached in the third gaming state, the consecutive number of times stored in the first storage means and the consecutive number of times stored in the second storage means are updated, and when the first determination result is reached, the consecutive number of times stored in the first storage means is updated, while the consecutive number of times stored in the second storage means is not updated.
a third special transition means for transitioning to the third gaming state upon termination of the special gaming state when the first determination result occurs in the third gaming state and the consecutive number of times stored in the first storage means has not reached the first specified number of times;
a fourth special transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state upon termination of the special gaming state when the second determination result occurs in the third gaming state and the consecutive number of times stored in the first storage means has not reached the first specified number of times;
The gaming machine described in feature A8 is configured so that when the fourth special transition means transitions from the third gaming state to the second gaming state, the memory of the consecutive number of times in the first memory means is retained.

According to the configuration shown in this characteristic, there may be a difference in which of the two limiters is activated first when transitioning from the first game state to the second game state and when transitioning from the third game state to the second game state. By adopting such a configuration, the effect of suppressing monotony of the game can be more effectively exerted.

Feature A10. The gaming machine described in Feature A9, characterized in that the transition from the third gaming state to the second gaming state is configured to be more difficult than the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.

According to feature A10, while the first game state → second game state is the main transition route to the second game state, the behavior after returning from the third game state → second game state (the order in which the limiter operates) can be made different from the main transition route. This makes it possible to more effectively suppress monotony in gameplay.

Feature A11. The third game state is configured such that the number of game balls dispensed per unit time when game balls are launched into a predetermined flow path provided in the game area is smaller than that in the second game state and is larger than that in the first game state;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A4 to A10, wherein the second specified number of times is smaller than the difference between the first specified number of times and the second specified number of times.

As shown in feature A11, by configuring the game to transition from a second game state in which a large number of balls are dispensed per unit time to a third game state in which a relatively small number of balls are dispensed per unit time and to remain in the third game state until the second limiter is activated, it is possible to prevent an excessive number of balls from being dispensed in a short period of time, thereby contributing to the soundness of the game.

Feature A12. A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 64, 65) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
When the game is switched to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) is provided for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state.
As the special game state, a first special game state (a special game state corresponding to a 10R special jackpot) and a second special game state (a special game state corresponding to a 2R special jackpot or a special jackpot) in which the variable ball entry section is in an accepting state for a shorter period than in the first special game state are provided;
the special game state transition means has a means for transitioning to the first special game state when the specific judgment result is obtained in the second game state,
As a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information in the third gaming state, a first judgment result (2R special probability big win) which is a transition trigger to the high probability mode and the first switching mode, and a second judgment result (10R special probability big win A) which is a transition trigger to the high probability mode and the second switching mode are provided;
When the second determination result is reached in the third gaming state, the consecutive number of times stored in the first storage means and the consecutive number of times stored in the second storage means are updated, and when the first determination result is reached, the consecutive number of times stored in the first storage means is updated, while the consecutive number of times stored in the second storage means is not updated.
A gaming machine described in any one of features A4 to A11, characterized in that it is provided with a means for transitioning to the third gaming state upon the end of the second special gaming state when the first judgment result occurs in the third gaming state and the consecutive number of times stored in the first memory means has not reached the first specified number.

According to feature A12, in the second game state, a specific judgment result → first special game state → second game state is looped until the limiter is activated, allowing many balls to be dispensed. When the limiter is activated from the second game state and a transition is made to the third game state, a certain number of balls can be expected to be dispensed by transitioning to the second special game state, but a rapid increase in the number of balls held is suppressed. After transitioning to the third game state, the third game state remains in question until the limiter is activated, thereby suppressing the generation of an excessively large number of balls in a short period of time, which contributes to the soundness of the game.

The technical ideas shown in Features A5 to A12 may also be applied to Features A1 to A3 above.

<Characteristics Group B>
The following feature B group was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means which launches gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a bonus such as a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature B1. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 222) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry sections (general winning opening 61, operational winning sections 62, 63, variable winning devices 64, 65) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating ball scoring section 62, 63) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group for a special jackpot);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to a judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (e.g., the first normal game state to the third normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
When the game is switched to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) is provided for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state.
As the predetermined gaming states, a first gaming state (first normal gaming state), a second gaming state (second normal gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and a third gaming state (third normal gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and less advantageous to the player than the second gaming state are provided;
A first transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the second game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the second game state upon the end of the special game state when a first transition condition is established in the first game state (when a 10R special jackpot A is won);
A second transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the third game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the third game state upon termination of the special game state when a second transition condition is established in the second game state (when a time-saving limiter is activated);
A third transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the first game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the first game state upon termination of the special game state when a third transition condition is established in the third game state (when a certain probability limiter is activated);
A fourth transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the second game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the second game state when a fourth transition condition is established in the third game state (when a 10R special probability jackpot A occurs before the special probability limiter is activated),
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the number of games executed in a first gaming state is compared with the number of games executed in a second gaming state at the same number, the satisfaction of the fourth transition condition before the satisfaction of the third transition condition in the third gaming state is made more difficult than the satisfaction of the first transition condition in the first gaming state.

In the configuration shown in this characteristic, it is possible to advance the game advantageously by transitioning from the first game state to the second game state. After transitioning from the second game state to the first game state via the third game state, the game is played again with the aim of reaching the second game state. Here, although the third game state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first game state, transitioning to the most advantageous second game state is more difficult than the first game state. In this way, if the configuration is such that the first game state is returned to via the third game state, in which transition to the second game state is difficult, excessive continuation of the second game state can be suppressed. This is preferable, for example, in terms of creating a large number of balls while suppressing excessive increase in gambling caused by it (for example, excessive balls being discharged in a short period of time).

In addition, the description in this characteristic that "The predetermined game states include a first game state (first normal game state), a second game state (second normal game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a third game state (third normal game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state and less advantageous to the player than the second game state" has been changed to "The predetermined game states include the first game state (first normal game state), and the number of game balls launched by the game ball launching means per unit time when the launch of game balls toward a predetermined flow path in the game area is continued." may be changed to read, "there are provided a second game state (second normal game state) in which the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired by the game ball firing means per unit time is set to be greater than that of the first game state, and a third game state (third normal game state) in which the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired by the game ball firing means per unit time is set to be greater than that of the first game state and smaller than that of the second game state when the firing of game balls toward a predetermined flow path in the game area is continued."

Feature B2. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A game ball launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 222) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry sections (general winning opening 61, operational winning sections 62, 63, variable winning devices 64, 65) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating ball scoring section 62, 63) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group for a big win);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to a judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the third normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
When the game is switched to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) is provided for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state.
As the special game state, a first special game state (a special game state corresponding to a 10R probability variable jackpot) and a second special game state (a special game state corresponding to a 2R probability variable jackpot) in which the period during which the variable ball entry section is in an accepting state is shorter than that of the first special game state are provided,
As the predetermined gaming states, a first gaming state (first normal gaming state), a second gaming state (second normal gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and a third gaming state (third normal gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and less advantageous to the player than the second gaming state are provided;
In the second gaming state, when a gaming ball is launched into a predetermined flow path (right route) in the gaming area, the judgment result by the judgment means corresponds to the predetermined judgment information, so that it is easier to transition to the first special gaming state compared to the first gaming state and the third gaming state.
A consecutive number storage means (time-saving consecutive number counter) for storing the consecutive number of times that a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information has occurred at least during the second gaming state;
A first transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the second gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the second gaming state when a first transition condition is established in the first gaming state (when a 10R special jackpot is won);
a second transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the third game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining that a second transition condition is established when a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained in the second game state and the consecutive number of times stored in the consecutive number storage means reaches a specified number (e.g., 10 times), and for transitioning to the third game state upon the end of the special game state;
A third transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the first game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the first game state upon termination of the special game state when a third transition condition is established in the third game state (when a certain probability limiter is activated);
A fourth transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the second game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the second game state when a fourth transition condition is established in the third game state (when a 10R special probability jackpot A occurs before the special probability limiter is activated),
A gaming machine characterized in that the fourth transition condition is configured to be satisfied more difficultly in the third gaming state than the first transition condition is satisfied in the first gaming state.

In the configuration shown in this feature, after the transition to the second game state, the second game state and the first special game state are looped until the number of consecutive times that the judgment result corresponds to the predetermined judgment information reaches a specified number, which provides a chance to win a large number of balls. When the number of consecutive times reaches the specified number, the game state transitions to the third game state, and the game state returns to the first game state when the third transition condition is met in the third game state. After returning to the first game state, the game is played again with the aim of reaching the second game state. Here, in the third game state, transition (return) to the second game state is more difficult than the first game state. For this reason, transition to the second game state can be prevented from transitioning to the first special game state excessively continuously. This is preferable, for example, in terms of creating a large number of balls while preventing excessive increase in gambling caused by it (for example, excessive balls being discharged in a short period of time).

Feature B3. The gaming machine described in Feature B2, characterized in that in the third gaming state, the judgment result by the judgment means is more likely to correspond to the predetermined judgment information than in the first gaming state, and when a gaming ball is launched into a predetermined flow path (right route) in the gaming area, the judgment result by the judgment means corresponds to the predetermined judgment information, making it easier to transition to the second special gaming state than in the first gaming state and the third gaming state.

According to feature B3, the third game state is configured to be more likely to produce a judgment result corresponding to the specified judgment information than the first game state, and monotony of the game in the third game state is suppressed. However, even if a judgment result corresponding to the specified judgment information is produced in the third game state, the majority of the time the game transitions to the second special game state, in which the opening period of the variable ball entry section is relatively short. In other words, although a certain amount of balls can be expected to be released, it is more difficult to increase the number of balls held compared to the second game state. If the third game state is intervened in the process of returning from the second game state to the first game state, there is a concern that the presence of the third game state will give the player the impression that it is bothersome, but the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by frequently producing judgment results corresponding to the specified judgment information and generating an appropriate amount of balls during the third game state.

Feature B4. A gaming machine according to Feature B2 or Feature B3, configured such that when the third gaming state is entered, the variable ball entry section enters the receiving state more frequently than in the first gaming state, thereby increasing the ratio of the number of gaming balls dispensed by the dispensing means to the number of gaming balls fired by the gaming ball firing means during a unit time.

According to feature B4, in the third game state, the variable ball entry section enters the receiving state more frequently than in the first game state, and the ratio of the number of game balls dispensed to the number of game balls released per unit time (the so-called base) becomes higher. In other words, the loss of balls can be reduced compared to the first game state. If the third game state is inserted during the process of returning from the second game state to the first game state, there is a concern that the presence of the third game state may give the player the impression that it is bothersome, but the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by frequently switching to the receiving state during the third game state to generate an appropriate number of balls.

Feature B5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features B2 to B4, characterized in that it is configured so that achieving the fourth transition condition during the third gaming state is more difficult than achieving the third transition condition during the third gaming state.

As shown in feature B2, etc., providing a return route from the third gaming state to the second gaming state is preferable in terms of diversifying the game and preventing a decrease in attention to the game during the third gaming state. However, if the return route functions frequently, it is concerned that it will hinder the generation of a large number of balls while preventing this from becoming a factor that excessively stimulates gambling, as shown in feature B2, etc. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by providing a difference so that the fulfillment of the fourth transition condition during the third gaming state is more difficult than the fulfillment of the third transition condition during the third gaming state, the above-mentioned concerns can be suitably alleviated.

Feature B6: The consecutive number of times storage means is a first storage means, and the specified number of times is a first specified number of times;
A second storage means (a consecutive number counter for a special probability variation) is provided for storing the consecutive number of times a specific result (a 2R special probability variation big win result) that is a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information during at least the third gaming state,
the third transition means is configured to determine that the third transition condition is established when the determination result by the determination means during the third gaming state becomes the specific result and the number of consecutive times stored in the second storage means becomes a second specified number (e.g., 40 times), and to transition to the first gaming state upon termination of the special gaming state;
A gaming machine described in any one of features B2 to B5, characterized in that the specific result triggers a transition to the second special game state.

As shown in this feature, by using a limiter to transition from the third game state to the first game state, it is possible to effectively mitigate the variation that would result in an extremely short duration in the third game state. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult for an event to occur in which, after transitioning from the second game state, in which a large number of balls may be dispensed, to the third game state, in which a large number of balls are not dispensed, the third game state immediately ends and the first game state is restored. Even in this configuration in which the third game state functions as a kind of time-buying function, the transition to the second special game state is repeated until the limiter is activated, thereby preventing the loss of balls and effectively preventing a decrease in the player's satisfaction in the third game state.

Feature B7. The identification result is a first identification result,
As a result of a judgment corresponding to the predetermined judgment in the third gaming state, a second specific result (10R certainty jackpot A) having a lower winning probability than the first specific result is included,
The gaming machine described in any one of features B2 to B6, characterized in that the fourth transition means is configured to determine that the fourth transition condition is established when the judgment result by the judgment means during the third gaming state becomes the second specific result, and to transition to the second gaming state upon the end of the special gaming state.

As shown by this feature, if the second specific result, which has a relatively low winning probability, is obtained during the third gaming state, a transition (return) to the second gaming state occurs with one win, whereas if the first specific result, which has a relatively high winning probability, is obtained, the first specific result continues until a prescribed number of times is reached, causing a transition (demotion) to the first gaming state. This can suitably prevent the game from becoming monotonous during the third gaming state.

Feature B8. The judgment mode (lottery mode) in which the judgment means performs the judgment is provided with a low probability mode in which the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information being obtained is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information being obtained is relatively high,
A gaming machine described in any one of features B2 to B7, characterized in that the judgment mode in the first game state is the low probability mode, and the judgment mode in the second game state and the third game state is the high probability mode.

According to feature B8, since both the second game state and the third game state correspond to the high probability mode, the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the specified judgment information does not decrease. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the tempo at which the judgment result corresponding to the specified judgment information is obtained as the game progresses from slowing down due to the transition from the second game state to the third game state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting the impression that the game is being unnecessarily delayed in a configuration in which the game transitions to the first game state via the third game state.

Incidentally, in the third gaming state, it is also possible to delay the return to the first gaming state (buy time) by simply lengthening the duration of each game round. However, this type of configuration does not require active participation in the game, and as a result, attention to the game decreases, which is expected to hinder the improvement of the operating rate.

The technical ideas shown in Features B3 to B8 may also be applied to Feature B1 above.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in Features B1 to B8 may be applied to the above Group A of Features.

<Characteristics Group C>
The following feature C group was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means which launches gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a bonus such as a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature C1. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 222) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry sections (general winning opening 61, operational winning sections 62, 63, variable winning devices 64, 65) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating ball scoring section 62, 63) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group for a special jackpot);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to a judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (e.g., the first normal game state to the third normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
When the game is switched to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) is provided for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state.
As the predetermined gaming states, a first gaming state (first normal gaming state), a second gaming state (second normal gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and a third gaming state (third normal gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and less advantageous to the player than the second gaming state are provided;
A first transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the second game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the second game state upon the end of the special game state when a first transition condition is established in the first game state (when a 10R special jackpot A is won);
A second transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the third game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the third game state upon termination of the special game state when a second transition condition is established in the second game state (when a time-saving limiter is activated);
a third transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the first game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the first game state upon termination of the special game state when a third transition condition is established in the third game state (when a certain probability limiter is activated);
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the first transition means, the second transition means and the third transition means transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state and the third gaming state in that order and then return to the first gaming state, the average period (30 minutes) required for transitioning from the second gaming state via the third gaming state to the first gaming state under a situation in which a gaming ball is continuously launched toward a predetermined route (right route) in the gaming area is greater than or equal to the average period (30 minutes) required for transitioning from the first gaming state via the second gaming state to the third gaming state under a situation in which a gaming ball is continuously launched toward the predetermined route.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the game state changes in the following order: 1st game state → 2nd game state → 3rd game state → 1st game state. The relationship of the player's advantage is 1st game state < 3rd game state < 2nd game state, and the change in advantage prevents the game from becoming monotonous.
Here, if the game state returns to the first game state immediately after the game state is changed from the second game state to the third game state, there is a high possibility that the game state will be changed again (re-promotion) in a short span. The occurrence of such an event can cause excessive balls to be dispensed. Although excessive balls can be suppressed by lowering the degree of advantage in the second game state, it is assumed that the difference in the degree of advantage between the first game state and the third game state will be reduced, and the game will become less interesting. This is a concern as a major constraint in suppressing monotony in the game and increasing attention to the game. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the average time required for the game state to move from the second game state to the first game state via the third game state under a situation in which the game balls are continuously (continuously without interruption) launched to a predetermined route is set to be equal to or longer than the average time required for the game state to move from the first game state to the third game state under similar circumstances, thereby earning an interval until the game state is returned to the second game state, and excessive balls can be suppressed from being dispensed in a short period of time. This is preferable in terms of relaxing the restrictions on the advantage of the second gaming state and enhancing the excitement of the game (creating a large number of balls being put out). For the above reasons, the above configuration makes it possible to favorably increase the level of attention to the game.

In addition, the description in this characteristic that "The predetermined game states include a first game state (first normal game state), a second game state (second normal game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a third game state (third normal game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state and less advantageous to the player than the second game state" has been changed to "The predetermined game states include the first game state (first normal game state), and the number of game balls launched by the game ball launching means per unit time when the launch of game balls toward a predetermined flow path in the game area is continued." may be changed to read, "there are provided a second game state (second normal game state) in which the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired by the game ball firing means per unit time is set to be greater than that of the first game state, and a third game state (third normal game state) in which the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired by the game ball firing means per unit time is set to be greater than that of the first game state and smaller than that of the second game state when the firing of game balls toward a predetermined flow path in the game area is continued."

Feature C2. A number of times storage means (a consecutive number of times counter for a special probability change) that is a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information during at least the third gaming state is provided,
The gaming machine described in feature C1 is characterized in that the third transition means is configured to determine that the third transition condition is established when the judgment result by the judgment means during the third game state becomes the specific result and the consecutive number of times stored in the number memory means becomes a predetermined number (e.g., 40 times), and to transition to the first game state upon the end of the special game state.

After transitioning to the third gaming state, the game remains in the third gaming state until the number of consecutive specific results reaches a predetermined number, reducing the variation in the duration (required period) of the loop section from the third gaming state to the special gaming state that would otherwise be extremely short, and effectively demonstrating the delay effect shown in feature C1. In addition, since the specific result is the trigger for transitioning to the special gaming state, the game will alternate between the third gaming state and the special gaming state during that loop section. This is preferable in terms of preventing the game progress from becoming monotonous.

Feature C3. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 222) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry sections (general winning opening 61, operational winning sections 62, 63, variable winning devices 64, 65) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating ball scoring section 62, 63) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group for a big win);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to a judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (e.g., the first normal game state to the third normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
When the game is switched to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) is provided for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state.
As the special game state, a first special game state (a special game state corresponding to a 10R probability variable jackpot) and a second special game state (a special game state corresponding to a 2R probability variable jackpot) in which the period during which the variable ball entry section is in an accepting state is shorter than that of the first special game state are provided,
As the predetermined gaming states, a first gaming state (first normal gaming state), a second gaming state (second normal gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and a third gaming state (third normal gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and less advantageous to the player than the second gaming state are provided;
In the second gaming state, when a gaming ball is launched into a predetermined flow path (right route) in the gaming area, the judgment result by the judgment means corresponds to the predetermined judgment information, so that it is easier to transition to the first special gaming state compared to the first gaming state and the third gaming state.
A consecutive number storage means (time-saving consecutive number counter) for storing the consecutive number of times that a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information has occurred at least during the second gaming state;
A first transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the second gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the second gaming state when a first transition condition is established in the first gaming state (when a 10R special jackpot is won);
a second transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the third game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining that a second transition condition is established when a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained in the second game state and the consecutive number of times stored in the consecutive number storage means reaches a specified number (e.g., 10 times), and for transitioning to the third game state upon the end of the special game state;
A third transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the first game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the first game state upon termination of the special game state when a third transition condition is established in the third game state (when a certain probability limiter is activated);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the first transition means, the second transition means and the third transition means transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state and the third gaming state in that order and then return to the first gaming state, the average period (30 minutes) required for transitioning from the second gaming state via the third gaming state to the first gaming state under a situation in which a gaming ball is continuously launched toward a predetermined route (right route) in the gaming area is greater than or equal to the average period (30 minutes) required for transitioning from the first gaming state via the second gaming state to the third gaming state under a situation in which a gaming ball is continuously launched toward the predetermined route.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the game state changes in the following order: first game state → second game state → third game state → first game state. The relationship of the player's advantage is first game state < third game state < second game state, and the change in advantage prevents the game from becoming monotonous. In particular, if the judgment result (jackpot) corresponds to the specified judgment information in the second game state, the game transitions to the relatively advantageous first special game state, and the second game state and the special game state are looped until the number of times reaches a specified number. As a result, by transitioning to the second game state, a large number of balls can be expected to be dispensed. In contrast, in the third game state, if the judgment result corresponds to the specified judgment information, the game transitions to the relatively disadvantageous second special game state, and the expectation of balls being dispensed is lower than in the second game state.

Here, if the first game state is immediately returned to immediately after the transition from the second game state to the third game state, there is a high possibility of re-transition (re-promotion) to the second game state in a short span. The occurrence of such an event can be a factor in excessive ball output. Although excessive ball output can be suppressed by lowering the degree of advantage in the second game state, it is assumed that the sharpness of the game will decrease as the difference in the degree of advantage between the first game state and the third game state becomes smaller. This is a concern as a major constraint in suppressing monotony of the game and increasing attention to the game. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the average required period when transitioning from the second game state via the third game state to the first game state under a situation in which the launch of game balls to a specified route is continuously (continuously without interruption) is set to be longer than the average required period when transitioning from the first game state via the second game state to the third game state under similar circumstances, and an interval is gained until the return to the second game state, thereby suppressing excessive ball output in a short period of time. This is preferable in terms of relaxing the restrictions on the advantage of the second game state and enhancing the excitement of the game (creating a large number of balls being dispensed). For these reasons, the above configuration makes it possible to favorably increase the level of attention paid to the game.

Feature C4. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 222) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry sections (general winning opening 61, operational winning sections 62, 63, variable winning devices 64, 65) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating ball scoring section 62, 63) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group for a big win);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to a judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (e.g., the first normal game state to the third normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
When the game is switched to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) is provided for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state.
As the special game state, a first special game state (a special game state corresponding to a 10R probability variable jackpot) and a second special game state (a special game state corresponding to a 2R probability variable jackpot) in which the period during which the variable ball entry section is in an accepting state is shorter than that of the first special game state are provided,
As the predetermined gaming states, a first gaming state (first normal gaming state), a second gaming state (second normal gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and a third gaming state (third normal gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and less advantageous to the player than the second gaming state are provided;
In the second gaming state, when a gaming ball is launched into a predetermined flow path (right route) in the gaming area, the judgment result by the judgment means corresponds to the predetermined judgment information, so that it is easier to transition to the first special gaming state compared to the first gaming state and the third gaming state.
A consecutive number storage means (time-saving consecutive number counter) for storing the consecutive number of times that a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information has occurred at least during the second gaming state;
A first transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the second gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the second gaming state when a first transition condition is established in the first gaming state (when a 10R special jackpot is won);
a second transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the third game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining that a second transition condition is established when a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained in the second game state and the consecutive number of times stored in the consecutive number storage means reaches a specified number (e.g., 10 times), and for transitioning to the third game state upon the end of the special game state;
A third transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the first game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the first game state upon termination of the special game state when a third transition condition is established in the third game state (when a certain probability limiter is activated);
A fourth transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the second game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the second game state when a fourth transition condition is established in the third game state (when a 10R special probability jackpot A occurs before the special probability limiter is activated),
A gaming machine characterized in that, when transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state and the third gaming state in that order by the first transition means, the second transition means, the third transition means and the fourth transition means, and transitioning from the third gaming state to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state, an average required period (30 minutes) for transitioning from the second gaming state via the third gaming state to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state under a situation in which the launch of a gaming ball toward a predetermined route (right route) in the gaming area is being continuously executed is greater than or equal to the average required period (30 minutes) for transitioning from the first gaming state via the second gaming state to the third gaming state under a situation in which the launch of a gaming ball toward the predetermined route is being continuously executed.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the game state changes in the order of the first game state → the second game state → the third game state → the first game state or the second game state. The relationship of the player's advantage is first game state < third game state < second game state, and the change in advantage prevents the game from becoming monotonous. In particular, if the judgment result (jackpot) corresponding to the specified judgment information is obtained in the second game state, the game moves to the relatively advantageous first special game state, and the second game state and the special game state are looped until the number of times reaches a specified number. As a result, by moving to the second game state, a large number of balls can be expected to be dispensed. In contrast, in the third game state, if the judgment result corresponds to the specified judgment information, the game moves to the relatively disadvantageous second special game state, and the expectation of balls being dispensed is lower than in the second game state.

Here, if the first game state is immediately returned to immediately after the transition from the second game state to the third game state, there is a high possibility of re-transition (re-promotion) to the second game state in a short span. The occurrence of such an event can be a factor in excessive ball output. Although excessive ball output can be suppressed by lowering the degree of advantage in the second game state, it is assumed that the sharpness of the game will decrease as the difference in the degree of advantage between the first game state and the third game state becomes smaller. This is a concern as a major constraint in suppressing monotony of the game and increasing attention to the game. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the average required period when transitioning from the second game state via the third game state to the first game state under a situation in which the launch of game balls to a specified route is continuously (continuously without interruption) is set to be longer than the average required period when transitioning from the first game state via the second game state to the third game state under similar circumstances, and an interval is gained until the return to the second game state, thereby suppressing excessive ball output in a short period of time. This is preferable in terms of relaxing the restrictions on the advantage of the second game state and enhancing the excitement of the game (creating a large number of balls being dispensed). For these reasons, the above configuration makes it possible to favorably increase the level of attention paid to the game.

Feature C5. The gaming machine described in Feature C4, characterized in that it is configured so that achieving the fourth transition condition during the third gaming state is more difficult than achieving the third transition condition during the third gaming state.

As shown in feature C4, providing a return route from the third gaming state to the second gaming state is preferable in terms of diversifying the game and preventing a decline in attention to the game during the third gaming state. However, if the return route functions frequently, there is a concern that it will hinder the effect shown in feature C4 etc. (the effect of generating a large number of balls while preventing this from becoming a factor that excessively stimulates gambling). Therefore, as shown in this feature, by providing a difference so that the fourth transition condition during the third gaming state is more difficult to achieve than the third transition condition during the third gaming state, the above-mentioned concerns can be suitably alleviated.

Feature C6. The gaming machine described in Feature C5, characterized in that the game play control means is configured to set the operation period of the game play action for the game play in which the fourth transition condition is satisfied during the third game state so that the operation period is longer than the operation period of the game play action for the game play in which the third transition condition is satisfied during the third game state.

As shown in feature C6, by making the operation period of the game cycle action when returning from the third game state to the second game state longer than the operation period of the game cycle action when returning from the third game state to the first game state, it is possible to preferably prevent the interval between second game states (between large amounts of balls being dispensed) from becoming excessively short when the above-mentioned return route is functioning.

Feature C7. The gaming machine described in Feature C5 or Feature C6, characterized in that the game play control means is configured to set the operation period of the game play action for a game play in which the third transition condition is satisfied during the third game state so that the operation period is longer than the operation period of the game play action for a game play in which the third transition condition is not satisfied during the third game state.

As shown in feature C7, by shortening the operation period of the game-round action for a game round in which the third transition condition is not satisfied during the third game state, it is possible to quickly progress through the game round in the third game state. This is preferable in terms of preventing the game from becoming protracted in the third game state and preventing a decrease in the sense of exhilaration of the game.

Feature C8. The consecutive number storage means is a first storage means, and the specified number is a first specified number;
A second storage means (a consecutive number counter for a special probability variation) is provided for storing the consecutive number of times a specific result (a 2R special probability variation big win result) that is a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information during at least the third gaming state,
The gaming machine described in any one of Features C3 to C7, characterized in that the third transition means is configured to determine that the third transition condition is established when the judgment result by the judgment means during the third gaming state becomes the specific result and the consecutive number of times stored in the second memory means becomes a second specified number (e.g., 40 times), and to transition to the first gaming state upon the end of the special gaming state.

As shown in this feature, by using a limiter that transitions from the third gaming state to the first gaming state, it is possible to effectively mitigate the variation that would result in an extremely short duration in the third gaming state. In other words, it is possible to make it less likely that the third gaming state will immediately end and return to the first gaming state after transitioning from the second gaming state, in which a large number of balls may be dispensed, to the third gaming state, in which a large number of balls are not dispensed.

Feature C9. The gaming machine described in Feature C8, in which the specific result triggers a transition to the second special gaming state.

Even if the third game state is configured to function as a sort of time-buying mechanism as shown in feature C3, the loss of balls can be suppressed by repeatedly switching to the second special game state until the limiter is activated. This is preferable in terms of preventing the existence of the third game state from becoming a factor that reduces the satisfaction of the player.

Feature C10. The second specified number of times (e.g., 40 times) is greater than the first specified number of times (e.g., 10 times);
The gaming machine described in feature C8 or feature C9, wherein the game round control means is configured to set the operation periods of game round operations in at least game rounds other than the first game state and the game round that triggers a transition to the third game state in the third game state so that these operation periods are shorter than the operation periods of the game round operations of each game round in the second game state.

According to feature C10, the game rounds progress more quickly in the third game state than in the second game state. This makes it less likely that the third game state will give the impression that the game is being unnecessarily delayed.

Feature C11. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 222) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry sections (general winning opening 61, operational winning sections 62, 63, variable winning devices 64, 65) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating ball scoring section 62, 63) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group for a big win);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to a judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (e.g., the first normal game state to the third normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (electric device 71) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As the special game state, a first special game state (a special game state corresponding to a 10R probability variable jackpot) and a second special game state (a special game state corresponding to a 2R probability variable jackpot) in which the period during which the variable ball entry section is in an accepting state is shorter than that of the first special game state are provided,
A first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than that in the first switching mode are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means,
a low probability mode in which the probability of a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information being obtained is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information being obtained is relatively high, as a judgment mode (lottery mode) in which the judgment means makes the judgment;
As the predetermined game states, a first game state (first normal game state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, a second game state (second normal game state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode, and a third game state (fourth normal game state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode are provided.
In the second game state, when a game ball is launched toward a predetermined flow path (right route) in the game area, the judgment result by the judgment means corresponds to the predetermined judgment information, making it easier to transition to the first special game state compared to the first game state and the third game state, and in the third game state, when a game ball is launched toward a predetermined flow path (right route) in the game area, the judgment result by the judgment means corresponds to the predetermined judgment information, making it easier to transition to the second special game state compared to the second game state,
A first storage means (a time-saving consecutive number counter) for storing the number of consecutive times that a first specific result, which is a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, has occurred during the second gaming state;
A second storage means (a continuous number counter for a probability change) for storing the number of consecutive times that a second specific result, which is a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, has occurred during at least the third gaming state;
A first transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the second gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the second gaming state when a first transition condition is established in the first gaming state (when a 10R special jackpot is won);
a second transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the third game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining that a second transition condition is established when the first specific result is obtained in the second game state and the number of consecutive times stored in the first storage means reaches a first specified number (e.g., 10 times) and transitioning to the third game state with the end of the special game state;
a third transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the first game state or the third game state in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for determining that a third transition condition is established when the second specific result is achieved in the third game state and the number of consecutive times stored in the second storage means reaches a second specified number (e.g., 40 times) and transitioning to the first game state is made with the end of the special game state, and for transitioning to the third game state with the end of the special game state when the second specific result is achieved in the third game state and the number of consecutive times stored in the second storage means does not reach the second specified number (e.g., 40 times);
A fourth transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the second game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the second game state when a fourth transition condition is established in the third game state (when a 10R special probability jackpot A occurs before the special probability limiter is activated),
The fourth transition condition in the third gaming state is configured to be more difficult to achieve than the first transition condition in the first gaming state and the third transition condition in the third gaming state;
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the first transition means, the second transition means and the third transition means transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state and then to the third gaming state, and then from the third gaming state to the first gaming state, the average period (30 minutes) required for transitioning from the second gaming state via the third gaming state to the first gaming state under a situation in which a gaming ball is continuously launched toward a predetermined route (right route) in the gaming area is greater than or equal to the average period (30 minutes) required for transitioning from the first gaming state via the second gaming state to the third gaming state under a situation in which a gaming ball is continuously launched toward the predetermined route.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the game state changes in the order of the first game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the first switching mode → the second game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode → the third game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode → the first game state or the second game state, and the monotony of the game is suppressed by the change in the degree of advantage. In particular, if the judgment result (jackpot) corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is obtained in the second game state, the game state transitions to the relatively advantageous first special game state, and the second game state and the special game state are looped until the number of times reaches the specified number. As a result, by transitioning to the second game state, a large number of balls can be expected to be put out. In contrast, in the third game state, if the judgment result corresponds to the predetermined judgment information, the game state transitions to the relatively disadvantageous second special game state, and the third game state and the special game state are looped, but the expectation of balls is lower than during the second game state.

Here, if the first game state is immediately returned to immediately after the transition from the second game state to the third game state, there is a high possibility of re-transition (re-promotion) to the second game state in a short span. The occurrence of such an event can be a factor in excessive ball output. Although excessive ball output can be suppressed by lowering the degree of advantage in the second game state, it is assumed that the sharpness of the game will decrease as the difference in the degree of advantage between the first game state and the third game state becomes smaller. This is a concern as a major constraint in suppressing monotony of the game and increasing attention to the game. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the average required period when transitioning from the second game state via the third game state to the first game state under a situation in which the launch of game balls to a specified route is continuously (continuously without interruption) is set to be longer than the average required period when transitioning from the first game state via the second game state to the third game state under similar circumstances, and an interval is gained until the return to the second game state, thereby suppressing excessive ball output in a short period of time. This is preferable in terms of relaxing the restrictions on the advantage of the second game state and enhancing the excitement of the game (creating a large number of balls being dispensed). For these reasons, the above configuration makes it possible to favorably increase the level of attention paid to the game.

The technical ideas shown in Features C2 to C10 may also be applied to Feature C11.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in Features C1 to C11 may be applied to the above Features A to B.

<Feature D group>
The following feature D group was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means which launches gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a bonus such as a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature D1. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A game ball launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 222) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry sections (general winning opening 61, operational winning sections 62, 63, variable winning devices 64, 65) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating ball scoring section 62, 63) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group for a big win);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to a judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (e.g., the first normal game state to the third normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
When the game is switched to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) is provided for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state.
As the predetermined gaming states, a first gaming state (first normal gaming state), a second gaming state (second normal gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and a third gaming state (third normal gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and less advantageous to the player than the second gaming state are provided;
a first transition means (a function of executing a transition process from the first normal game state to the second normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the second game state upon the end of the special game state when a first transition condition is established in the first game state (when a 10R special jackpot A is won);
A second transition means (a function of executing a transition process from the first normal game state to the third normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the third game state upon the end of the special game state when a second transition condition is established in the first game state (when a 2R special jackpot is won);
a third transition means (a function of executing a transition process from the second normal game state to the third normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the third game state upon termination of the special game state when a third transition condition is established in the second game state (when a time-saving limiter is activated);
a fourth transition means (a function of executing a transition process from the third normal game state to the second normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the second game state upon the end of the special game state when a fourth transition condition is established in the third game state (when a 10R special jackpot A is won);
A gaming machine characterized in that the fourth transition condition is configured so that the possibility of the fourth transition condition being satisfied during the third gaming state is lower when the first transition means and the third transition means transition from the first gaming state to the third gaming state via the second gaming state than when the second transition means transitions from the first gaming state to the third gaming state without passing through the second gaming state.

According to feature D1, when the first gaming state is transitioned to the third gaming state via the second gaming state, it becomes more difficult for the player to transition from the third gaming state to the second gaming state, which is more advantageous for the player, than when the first gaming state is transitioned to the third gaming state without passing through the second gaming state. In other words, when transitioning to the third gaming state, the degree of difficulty of returning to or promoting to the second gaming state differs depending on whether or not the second gaming state, which is an advantageous gaming state, has been passed through. In particular, by favoring promotion to the third gaming state without passing through the second gaming state, so that it is easier than returning to the third gaming state via the second gaming state, it is possible to diversify games while suppressing excessive bias in the player's advantage.

Feature D2. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A game ball launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 222) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry sections (general winning opening 61, operational winning sections 62, 63, variable winning devices 64, 65) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating ball scoring section 62, 63) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group for a big win);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to a judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (e.g., the first normal game state to the third normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
When the game is switched to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) is provided for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state.
As the predetermined gaming states, a first gaming state (first normal gaming state), a second gaming state (second normal gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and a third gaming state (third normal gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and less advantageous to the player than the second gaming state are provided;
a first transition means (a function of executing a transition process from the first normal game state to the second normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the second game state upon the end of the special game state when a first transition condition is established in the first game state (when a 10R special jackpot A is won);
A second transition means (a function of executing a transition process from the first normal game state to the third normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the third game state upon the end of the special game state when a second transition condition is established in the first game state (when a 2R special jackpot is won);
a third transition means (a function of executing a transition process from the second normal game state to the third normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the third game state upon termination of the special game state when a third transition condition is established in the second game state (when a time-saving limiter is activated);
a fourth transition means (a function of executing a transition process from the third normal game state to the second normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the second game state upon the end of the special game state when a fourth transition condition is established in the third game state (when a 10R special jackpot A is won);
A consecutive number of times storage means (a consecutive number of times counter for a probability variable) stores the consecutive number of times that the judgment result by the judgment means in at least the second game state and the third game state becomes a specific result (a probability variable jackpot result) that is a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information;
a fifth transition means (a function of executing a transition process from the third normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the first game state upon termination of the special game state when the specific result is achieved in the third game state and the number of consecutive times stored in the consecutive times storage means reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 40 times);
A gaming machine characterized in that the remaining number of times that will reach the specified number during the third gaming state when a transition is made from the first gaming state to the third gaming state via the second gaming state by the first transition means and the third transition means is made to be less than the remaining number of times that will reach the specified number during the third gaming state when a transition is made from the first gaming state to the third gaming state by the second transition means without passing through the second gaming state.

According to feature D2, when the first gaming state is transitioned to the third gaming state via the second gaming state, it is more difficult for the player to transition from the third gaming state to the second gaming state, which is more advantageous for the player, than when the first gaming state is transitioned to the third gaming state without passing through the second gaming state. In other words, when transitioning to the third gaming state, the difficulty of satisfying the fourth transition condition before the number of consecutive wins = the predetermined number of times (the fifth transition condition is satisfied), that is, the difficulty of returning to or promoting to the second gaming state, differs depending on whether or not the second gaming state, which is an advantageous gaming state, is passed through. In particular, by favoring the promotion to the third gaming state without passing through the second gaming state so that it is easier than returning to the third gaming state via the second gaming state, excessive bias in the player's advantage can be suppressed while realizing diversification of games.

Feature D3. The consecutive number storage means is configured to be able to retain the memory of the consecutive number even when the game state transitions between the second game state and the third game state (configuration in which the consecutive number counter is not reset),
The gaming machine described in feature D2 is characterized in that when the first gaming state is transitioned to the third gaming state via the second gaming state, the number of times remaining to reach the predetermined number of times during the third gaming state is reduced depending on the number of times the specific result (high probability jackpot result) is achieved during the second gaming state.

As shown in feature D3, if the number of consecutive plays is carried over from the second game state to the third game state, and the number of remaining plays required to reach the predetermined number of plays decreases depending on the number of times a specific result is achieved during the second game state, the fourth transition condition is more likely to be met before the predetermined number of plays is reached if the game state is transitioned to the third game state not via the second game state than if the game state is transitioned to the third game state via the second game state. With this configuration, the effect shown in feature D2 can be preferably achieved.

Feature D4. A gaming machine according to Feature D2 or Feature D3, characterized in that the probability that the fourth transition condition will be met in each play in the third gaming state is the same in both cases, when the first gaming state transitions to the third gaming state via the second gaming state and when the first gaming state transitions to the third gaming state without passing through the second gaming state.

According to feature D4, when the second gaming state is not reached, the number of games that can be played in order to achieve the fourth transition condition increases until the number of consecutive games reaches a predetermined number (the fifth transition condition is met). This configuration, which creates a difference in superiority depending on the number of games played, makes it possible to keep the probability of the fourth transition condition being achieved low and to optimally earn time while enjoying playing in the third gaming state.

Feature D5. The consecutive number storage means is configured to be able to retain the memory of the consecutive number even when the game state transitions between the second game state and the third game state (configuration in which the consecutive number counter is not reset),
A gaming machine described in any one of features D2 to D4, characterized in that in the third gaming state, the fourth transition condition is satisfied before the consecutive number of times stored in the consecutive number memory means reaches the predetermined number, transitioning to the second gaming state, and the third transition condition is satisfied during the second gaming state, returning to the third gaming state, thereby reducing the remaining number of times that will reach the predetermined number during the third gaming state.

According to feature D5, when the sequence goes from the third gaming state to the second gaming state to the third gaming state, the number of remaining plays until the predetermined number of plays is reached is fewer in the second third gaming state than in the first third gaming state. In this way, preventing excessive loops between the third gaming state and the second gaming state is preferable in terms of ensuring the soundness of the gaming machine.

Feature D6. During the second gaming state, the transition to the special gaming state triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information can be repeated (looped) until the third transition condition is established;
A gaming machine described in any one of features D2 to D5, characterized in that the number of times that the second gaming state can be transitioned to the special gaming state as a result of a judgment result corresponding to the specified judgment information changes depending on the number of times that the specific result is achieved in the third gaming state prior to the transition to the second gaming state until the fourth transition condition is met.

According to feature D6, the number of loops between the second game state and the special game state changes depending on the number of times a specific result is achieved in the third game state. In this way, by strengthening the relationship between the second game state and the third game state, the effect of attracting attention to the game by diversifying the game can be more effectively exerted.

Feature D7. The gaming machine described in Feature D6, characterized in that the number of times that the second gaming state can be transitioned to the special gaming state in response to a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information during the second gaming state is configured to decrease as the number of times remaining when the fourth transition condition is met during the third gaming state increases.

According to feature D7, the number of times that a specific result is achieved in the third game state increases, so that the number of times that a transition to the special game state can occur during the second game state (the number of times that the second game state can be looped from the special game state) decreases. With this configuration, the actual advantage in the second game state depends on the timing at which the fourth transition condition is met during the third game state, and it is possible to ideally realize diversification of the game.

Feature D8. The judgment mode (lottery mode) in which the judgment means performs the judgment is provided with a low probability mode in which the probability of the judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is relatively high;
the first gaming state is a gaming state in which the lottery mode is the low probability mode;
A gaming machine described in any one of features D2 to D7, characterized in that the second gaming state and the third gaming state are gaming states in which the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode.

In the configuration shown in feature D2, etc., there is a concern that if the game in the third game state becomes monotonous, the player's motivation to play will decrease. In this regard, as shown in this feature, by setting the lottery mode in the third game state to a high probability mode and increasing the frequency of a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information in the third game state, it is possible to suitably suppress the monotony of the game in the third game state.

Feature D9. A variable mechanism (electric device 71) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) is provided,
A first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than that in the first switching mode are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means,
As a judgment mode (lottery mode) in which the judgment means performs the judgment, a low probability mode in which the probability of the judgment result (jackpot) corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is relatively high are provided;
the first gaming state is a gaming state in which the switching control mode is the first switching mode and the lottery mode is the low probability mode;
the second gaming state is a gaming state in which the switching control mode is the second switching mode and the lottery mode is the high probability mode;
A gaming machine described in any one of features D2 to D7, characterized in that the third gaming state is a gaming state in which the switching control mode is the first switching mode and the lottery mode is the high probability mode.

In the configuration shown in feature D2, etc., if the game in the third game state becomes monotonous, there is a concern that the player's motivation to play will decrease. In this regard, as shown in this feature, by setting the lottery mode in the third game state as a high probability mode and increasing the frequency of the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information in the third game state, the monotony of the game in the third game state can be suitably suppressed. In addition, by transitioning from the second game state to the third game state, the switching control mode is switched from the second switching mode to the first switching mode. Here, as shown in this feature, by maintaining the high probability mode during the third game state and increasing the frequency of the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, it becomes easier to enjoy the benefit of the special game state → payout of game balls. As a result, the decrease in the number of balls in the third game state can be suppressed compared to the first game state. In this way, by ensuring the superiority of the third game state over the first game state in terms of the number of balls, the rapid decrease in the player's motivation to play due to the transition to the third game state can be suppressed.

Feature D10. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A game ball launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 222) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry sections (general winning opening 61, operational winning sections 62, 63, variable winning devices 64, 65) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating ball scoring section 62, 63) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to a judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (e.g., the first normal game state to the third normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
When the game is switched to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) is provided for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state.
As the predetermined gaming states, a first gaming state (first normal gaming state), a second gaming state (second normal gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and a third gaming state (third normal gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and less advantageous to the player than the second gaming state are provided;
a first transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state upon termination of the special gaming state when a first transition condition is established in the first gaming state;
a second transition means for transitioning the special gaming state to the third gaming state when a second transition condition is established in the first gaming state;
a third transition means for transitioning to the third gaming state upon termination of the special gaming state when a third transition condition is established in the second gaming state;
a fourth transition means for transitioning the special gaming state to the second gaming state when a fourth transition condition is established in the third gaming state;
A consecutive number of times storage means (a consecutive number of times counter for a probability variable) stores the consecutive number of times that the judgment result by the judgment means in the second game state and the third game state becomes a specific result (a probability variable jackpot result) which is a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information;
a fifth transition means for transitioning to the first gaming state upon termination of the special gaming state when the specific result is achieved at least in the third gaming state and the number of consecutive times stored in the consecutive times storage means reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 40 times);
a remaining number of times that will reach the predetermined number of times during the third game state when a transition is made from the first game state to the third game state via the second game state by the first transition means and the third transition means is made smaller than a remaining number of times that will reach the predetermined number of times during the third game state when a transition is made from the first game state to the third game state by the second transition means without passing through the second game state;
During the second gaming state, a transition to the special gaming state triggered by a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information can be repeated until the third transition condition is satisfied.
A gaming machine characterized in that the number of times that the second gaming state can be transitioned to the special gaming state as a result of a judgment result corresponding to the specified judgment information decreases as the number of times that the specific result is achieved during the third gaming state until the fourth transition condition is met increases.

According to feature D10, the number of times that a specific result is achieved in the third game state increases, so that the number of times that a transition to the special game state can occur during the second game state (the number of times that the second game state can be looped from the special game state) decreases. With this configuration, the actual advantage in the second game state depends on the timing at which the fourth transition condition is met during the third game state, and it is possible to ideally realize diversification of the game.

The technical ideas shown in features D3 to D9 may also be applied to features D1 and D10.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in Features B1 to B10 may be applied to the above Features A to C.

<Features Group E>
The following feature E group was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a bonus such as a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature E1. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A game ball launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 222) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry sections (general winning opening 61, operational winning sections 62, 63, variable winning devices 64, 65) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating ball scoring section 62, 63) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group for a big win);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to a judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (electric device 71) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As the special game states, a first special game state (high frequency winning mode: special game state corresponding to a big win) and a second special game state (low frequency winning mode: special game state corresponding to a special win) in which the variable ball entry section is in a receiving state for a shorter period than in the first special game state are provided,
As the predetermined judgment information, first judgment information (a random number group for a jackpot corresponding to a high frequency support mode), second judgment information (a random number group for a jackpot corresponding to a low frequency support mode), and third judgment information (a random number group for a special jackpot) are provided,
The special game state transition means includes:
a means for transitioning to the first special game state when the determination result by the determination means is a first type determination result corresponding to the first determination information (e.g., a jackpot result corresponding to a high frequency support mode) or a second type determination result corresponding to the second determination information (e.g., a jackpot result corresponding to a low frequency support mode);
a means for transitioning to the second special game state when the determination result by the determination means becomes a third type determination result (a special winning result) corresponding to the third determination information;
A first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than that in the first switching mode are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means,
As a judgment mode (lottery mode) in which the judgment means performs the judgment, a low probability mode in which the probability of the first type judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information or the second type judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information being obtained is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of the first type judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information or the second type judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information being obtained is relatively high,
As the predetermined gaming states, a first gaming state (first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, a second gaming state (second normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode and more advantageous to a player than the first gaming state, and a third gaming state (third normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode and more advantageous to a player than the first gaming state are provided;
a probability that the third type judgment result corresponding to the third judgment information will be obtained by the judgment in the third gaming state is higher than a probability that the third type judgment result corresponding to the third judgment information will be obtained by the judgment in the second gaming state;
a first transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state upon termination of the first special gaming state when the first type judgment result is obtained in the second gaming state and the number of consecutive times when the first type judgment result is obtained does not reach a specified number (e.g., 10 times);
and a second transition means for transitioning to the third game state upon termination of the first special game state when the first type judgment result is obtained in the second game state and the number of consecutive times that the first type judgment result has been obtained reaches the specified number.

In the second game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, if the number of consecutive times that resulted in the first type judgment result does not reach the specified number, the game state returns to the second game state after the special game state triggered by the first type judgment result ends. If such a loop is repeated and the number of consecutive times that resulted in the first type judgment result reaches the specified number, the game state transitions to the third game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode. In other words, the reaching of the specified number of times triggers the transition to the third game state. In the third game state, the probability of the third type judgment result corresponding to the third judgment information is higher than in the second game state, and transitions to the second special game state occur frequently. This makes it possible to play while suppressing the loss of balls or increasing the number of balls during the third game state. According to the above configuration, a player who expects to transition to the third game state will aim to transition to the third game state while earning balls by repeatedly transitioning to the first special game state during the second game state, and the satisfaction of the player can be suitably improved.

The configuration shown in this characteristic is defined as "a gaming machine having a gaming board (gaming board 60) on which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed, a gaming ball launching means (gaming ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on the player's operation, and a payout means (payout device 222) for paying out gaming balls (prize balls) based on a ball entering an entry section (general winning opening 61, operational winning entry sections 62, 63, variable winning devices 64, 65) provided in the gaming area, and a special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball enters a starting entry section (operational entry section 62, 63) serving as the entry section, and a function of acquiring information acquired by the special information acquisition means." the acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the acquired information storage means, a judgment means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for judging whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined judgment information (for example, a random number group for a big win), and a game round operation (variable display of a pattern in the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to a judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment, which is counted as one game round, and the game round operation is ended according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation for each game round is performed by the game round control means; a special game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game round operation by the game round control means being completed; The game machine includes a variable ball entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) as the ball entry section that can be switched to a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing opening and closing processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the game machine transitions to the special game state, a variable mechanism (electric role 71) that can be switched to an accepting state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the start ball entry section and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepting state, and a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric role support processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the variable mechanism, and a first special game state (high frequency winning mode: The special game state transition means is provided with a first type of judgment result (a jackpot result corresponding to the high frequency support mode) corresponding to the first judgment information, a second type of judgment result (a jackpot result corresponding to the low frequency support mode) corresponding to the second judgment information, and a third type of judgment result (a jackpot result corresponding to the low frequency support mode) corresponding to the first judgment information. The first type of judgment information (a jackpot result corresponding to the high frequency support mode) corresponds to the first judgment information, and a second type of judgment result (a jackpot result corresponding to the low frequency support mode) corresponds to the second judgment information. a means for transitioning to the first special game state when the determination result by the determination means becomes a third type determination result (special winning result) corresponding to the third determination information, and a means for transitioning to the second special game state when the determination result by the determination means becomes a third type determination result (special winning result) corresponding to the third determination information, and a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high frequency support mode) in which the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that in the first switching mode are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, and a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is made by the determination means is the first type determination result corresponding to the first determination information or the second type determination result corresponding to the second determination information. a low probability mode in which the probability of a result corresponding to the first judgment information being a low probability mode and a high probability mode in which the probability of a result corresponding to the first judgment information being a high probability mode are relatively high, and the predetermined gaming states include a first gaming state (first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, a second gaming state (second normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode and more advantageous to a player than the first gaming state, and a third gaming state (third normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode and more advantageous to a player than the second gaming state. The gaming machine is configured so that the probability of the third type judgment result corresponding to the third judgment information is higher than the probability of the third type judgment result corresponding to the third judgment information by the judgment in the second gaming state, and is characterized in that it is equipped with a first transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state upon the end of the first special gaming state when the first type judgment result is reached in the second gaming state and the consecutive number of times that the first type judgment result has been reached does not reach a specified number, and a second transition means for transitioning to the third gaming state upon the end of the first special gaming state when the first type judgment result is reached in the second gaming state and the consecutive number of times that the first type judgment result has been reached reaches a specified number.

Feature E2. The determination in the second gaming state may result in the second type determination result;
The gaming machine described in feature E1 is characterized in that it is equipped with a third transition means (a function of executing transition processing to the first normal gaming state, etc., in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to a gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode (e.g., a first normal gaming state) among the specified gaming states excluding the third gaming state upon the end of the first special gaming state when the second type judgment result is reached in the second gaming state.

According to feature E2, in order to reach the third gaming state, it is necessary to make successive first-type judgment results while avoiding second-type judgment results. With this configuration, it is possible to preferably increase the sense of tension in the game in the second gaming state.

Feature E3. The gaming machine described in Feature E2, which is characterized in that it is equipped with a restricting means for restricting the transition of the predetermined gaming state to a gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode in response to the second type judgment result during the third gaming state (a configuration for forcibly terminating a gaming round related to the second operating port by making it a miss due to a special win based on a win in the first operating port).

If the third gaming state ends with a second type judgment result immediately after transitioning from the second gaming state to the third gaming state, there is a concern that the player's motivation to play in the third gaming state will rapidly decline. In this regard, the configuration shown in this characteristic restricts the second type judgment result from being obtained after transitioning to the third gaming state. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a configuration that may result in a second type judgment result from being a factor that drastically shortens the duration of the third gaming state, thereby suppressing the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature E4. The specified number of times is a first specified number of times (e.g., 10 times);
a means for transitioning to the third game state upon the end of the first special game state when the second type judgment result (2R guaranteed big win result: a big win result corresponding to a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode) is obtained in the third game state and the number of consecutive times when the second type judgment result has been obtained has not reached a second specified number (for example, 40 times); and
A gaming machine as described in feature E2 or feature E3, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for transitioning to a gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode among the specified gaming states upon termination of the first special gaming state (a function for executing transition processing to a first normal gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) when the second type judgment result is obtained in the third gaming state (2R certainty jackpot result: a jackpot result corresponding to a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode) and the consecutive number of times that the second type judgment result has occurred reaches a second specified number.

According to the configuration shown in feature E4, after the transition to the third gaming state, the third gaming state and the first special gaming state are looped until the number of consecutive second-type judgment results reaches the second specified number. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the duration of stay in the third gaming state, and it is possible to preferably prevent the player from immediately degrading from the third gaming state to another predetermined gaming state, such as the first gaming state, immediately after the transition to the third gaming state.

Feature E5. The gaming machine described in Feature E4 is configured such that in the first special gaming state to which a transition is made based on the second type judgment result being obtained during the third gaming state, the period during which the variable ball entry section is in a receiving state is shorter than in the first special gaming state to which a transition is made based on the first type judgment result being obtained during the second gaming state.

Feature E5 makes it possible to prevent the advantage of the third gaming state from becoming extremely high. This is favorable for improving the soundness of the game.

In particular, when combined with feature E3, even if the number of balls dispensed in each of the first special game states is small in the third game state, the first special game state is repeated, thereby making it possible to speed up the tempo of the game while earning balls, and thus improving the satisfaction of the player.

Feature E6: A means for transitioning to the second gaming state upon the end of the first special gaming state when the first type determination result is obtained in the third gaming state;
A consecutive number storage means (a consecutive number counter for a probability change) for storing a consecutive number of times that is a determination result that is a transition trigger to a gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode in the second gaming state and the third gaming state;
A gaming machine as described in feature E4 or feature E5, characterized in that it is provided with a means for transitioning to another gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) among the specified gaming states excluding the second gaming state and the third gaming state upon the end of the first special gaming state when the consecutive number of times stored in the consecutive number memory means becomes the second specified number of times.

According to feature E6, after transitioning to the third gaming state, there are cases where a first type judgment result occurs and a transition (promotion or return) to the second gaming state, and cases where the number of times that a second type judgment result occurs reaches a second specified number and a transition (demotion) to another gaming state such as the first gaming state occurs. In this way, by configuring the game to branch, it is possible to prevent the duration of stay in the third gaming state from becoming extremely short, and to appropriately improve the satisfaction of the player after transitioning to the third gaming state.

Feature E7: When the first type determination result is obtained in the third gaming state, a means for transitioning to the second gaming state upon the end of the first special gaming state is provided;
A gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E6, characterized in that when transitioning from the third gaming state to the second gaming state, transitioning to the third gaming state is more difficult than when transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.

According to feature E7, the difficulty of transitioning from the second game state to the third game state varies depending on which route was taken to reach the second game state, thereby enabling the player to diversify the game while optimally increasing the sense of tension in the second game state.

Feature E8. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A gaming machine having a payout means (payout device 222) for paying out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry sections (general winning opening 61, operational winning sections 62, 63, variable winning devices 64, 65) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is scored into the starting ball scoring section (operating ball scoring section 62, 63) as the ball scoring section;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a big win result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with a game round being counted as one game round when a game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1, D2) is started prior to a judgment by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (e.g., the first normal game state to the third normal game state) based on the judgment result by the judgment means becoming a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game-use operation by the game-cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A variable mechanism (electric device 71) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As the special game states, a first special game state (high frequency winning mode: special game state corresponding to a big win) and a second special game state (low frequency winning mode: special game state corresponding to a special win) in which the variable ball entry section is in a receiving state for a shorter period than in the first special game state are provided,
As the predetermined judgment information, first judgment information (a random number group for a big win corresponding to a high frequency support mode) and second judgment information (a random number group for a special win) are provided,
The special game state transition means includes:
A means for transitioning to the first special game state when the determination result by the determination means is a first determination result (a big win result corresponding to the high frequency support mode) corresponding to the first determination information (a function of executing a transition process to the first special game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
a means for transitioning to the second special game state when the determination result by the determination means becomes a second determination result (special winning result) corresponding to the second determination information (a function of executing a transition process to the second special game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
A first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than that in the first switching mode are provided as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means,
As a judgment mode (lottery mode) in which the judgment means performs the judgment, a low probability mode in which the probability of the first judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information being obtained is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of the first judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information being obtained is relatively high,
As the predetermined gaming states, a first gaming state (first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, a second gaming state (second normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode and more advantageous to a player than the first gaming state, and a third gaming state (third normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode and more advantageous to a player than the first gaming state are provided;
a probability that the second judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information will be obtained by the judgment in the third gaming state is higher than a probability that the second judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information will be obtained by the judgment in the second gaming state;
a means for transitioning to the second gaming state upon termination of the first special gaming state when the first determination result occurs in the second gaming state and the number of consecutive times when the first determination result occurs has not reached a specified number (e.g., 10 times);
a means for transitioning to the third game state upon termination of the first special game state when the first judgment result is reached in the second game state and the number of consecutive times that the first judgment result has been reached reaches a specified number.

In the second game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, if the number of consecutive times that resulted in the first judgment result does not reach the specified number, the game state returns to the second game state after the end of the first special game state triggered by the first judgment result. If such a loop is repeated and the number of consecutive times that resulted in the first judgment result reaches the specified number, the game state transitions to the third game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode. In other words, the reaching of the specified number of times triggers the transition to the third game state. In the third game state, the probability of the second judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is higher than in the second game state, and transitions to the second special game state occur frequently. This makes it possible to play while suppressing the loss of balls or increasing the number of balls during the third game state. According to the above configuration, a player who expects to transition to the third game state will aim to transition to the third game state while earning balls by repeatedly transitioning to the first special game state during the second game state, and the satisfaction of the player can be suitably improved.

The technical ideas shown in features D3 to D9 may also be applied to features D1 and D10.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in Features E1 to E8 may be applied to the above Features A to D.

Incidentally, it is also possible to change the description of "predetermined technique state" shown in the above-mentioned feature group A to feature group E to the description of "normal game state."

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine that includes an operating means (game ball launching handle 41) operated by the player, a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) that launches game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage (such as the guide passage 103 of the guide rail 100) that guides the launched game ball to a specified game area (game area PE), and various game components (nails, etc.) arranged within the game area, and that awards a bonus to the player when the game ball passes through a specified passage section (general winning opening 61, etc.) of each of the game components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that changes and displays a series of symbols consisting of multiple symbols, and then displays the series of symbols at its final stop; the change in symbols is started by operating a start operating means, the change in symbols is stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol.

Ball-operated belt-type gaming machine: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable pattern string consisting of multiple patterns and then displays the final stop of the pattern string, in which the pattern variation is started due to the operation of a start operation means, the pattern variation is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stop pattern at the time of the stop is a specific pattern, and further equipped with a ball receiving tray and an insertion device that performs an insertion process to take in game balls from the ball receiving tray, and a payout device that pays out game balls to the ball receiving tray, and configured so that the operation of the start operation means is valid when game balls are inserted by the insertion device.

10... Pachinko machine as a gaming machine, 41... Game ball launching handle, 60... Game board, 62... First operating ball entry section, 62a... First operating port, 63... Second operating ball entry section, 63a... Second operating port, 64... Upper variable winning device, 65... Lower variable winning device, 71... Electric role, 75... Pattern display device, 75a... Display screen, 81... Main display unit, 162... Main control device, 602... MPU, 604... RAM, D... Main display section, D1... Display section for first operating port, D2... Display section for second operating port, PE... Play area.

Claims (1)

A game board on which a game area is formed;
a game ball launching means capable of launching game balls into the game area based on an operation by a player;
A special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a game ball enters a predetermined ball entry means provided in the game area;
a determining means for determining whether to transition a game state from a predetermined game state to a special game state that is advantageous to a player, based on the special information acquired by the special information acquiring means;
A means for controlling a predetermined notification means to perform a game operation based on the judgment by the judgment means, and to end the game operation as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment;
A means for transitioning to the special game state based on a result of the determination by the determination means;
A variable ball entry means that can be switched between a first state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the game area and a second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the game area than in the first state;
A means for executing switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable ball entry means when the special game state is entered;
A gaming machine comprising:
As game situations when the determination is made by the determination means in the predetermined game state, a first game situation, a second game situation which may be more advantageous to the player than the first game situation, and a third game situation which may be more advantageous to the player than the first game situation and may be more disadvantageous to the player than the second game situation can be configured;
A period from the establishment of a predetermined condition in the second gaming state to the change to another gaming state is configured to be shorter than a period from the establishment of a specific condition in the third gaming state to the change to another gaming state ,
A configuration in which the second gaming state can be changed to the third gaming state,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that the third gaming status can be changed to the second gaming status .

Images